George P Gibbs Jr

Little League

Sterling Massachusetts

2019 Managerrsquos Handbook

For

Managers and Coaches

April 17 2019 Revision 13

League ID Number 221-04-02

Table Of Contents

1 Introduction

2 League Structure and its Objectives

3 At What Level Does a Player Participate

4 Responsibilities of the Manager

41 ManagerCoach amp Role Model

42 Player Safety

43 Team Organization

44 General Responsibilities

45 Games Postponed Due to Inclement Weather

46 Team Rosters

47 Concession Stand Duty

5 Tee-Ball League

51 Team Selection

52 Skills to Teach

53 Game Format

6 Minor LeagueAA Division

61 Team Selection

62 Skills to Teach

63 Game Format 631 1St Half of the Season 632 2nd Half of the Season

7 Minor League AAA Division

71 Team Selection

72 Skills to Teach

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season 732 2nd Half of the Season Progression (changes)

74 All Star Competition

75 Post Season Tournament Play

8 Major League

81 Team Selection

82 Major League Championship

2

Table Of Contents

1 Introduction

2 League Structure and its Objectives

3 At What Level Does a Player Participate

4 Responsibilities of the Manager

41 ManagerCoach amp Role Model

42 Player Safety

43 Team Organization

44 General Responsibilities

45 Games Postponed Due to Inclement Weather

46 Team Rosters

47 Concession Stand Duty

5 Tee-Ball League

51 Team Selection

52 Skills to Teach

53 Game Format

6 Minor LeagueAA Division

61 Team Selection

62 Skills to Teach

63 Game Format 631 1St Half of the Season 632 2nd Half of the Season

7 Minor League AAA Division

71 Team Selection

72 Skills to Teach

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season 732 2nd Half of the Season Progression (changes)

74 All Star Competition

75 Post Season Tournament Play

8 Major League

81 Team Selection

82 Major League Championship

2

83 All Star Competition 831 Little League District All-Stars 832 B Team All-Stars 833 10 and Under All-Stars

84 Tournament Selection Process

85 Post Season Tournament Play

86 Managing Teams in Post Season Tournaments

9 League Player Agent

91 Major League

92 Minor League AAA Division

93 Minor League AA Division

94 Tee-Ball League

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form

3

1 Introduction This handbook is intended for Team Managers and Coaches of the George P Gibbs Jr Little League hereinafter referred to as the Local League It has been developed and approved by the Local Leaguersquos Board of Directors It is meant to provide information about the League as a whole its structure its rules and its objectives It is every Managerrsquos and Coachrsquos responsibility to abide by the rules as described in this document and the ldquoOfficial Regulations and Playing Rules for Tee Ball Minor League and Little League Baseballrdquo The ldquoOfficial Regulations and Playing Rules for Tee Ball Minor League and Little League Baseballrdquo is published yearly by Little League Inc This handbook is a supplement to the ldquoOfficial Regulations and Playing Rules for Tee Ball Minor League and Little League Baseballrdquo This document may only be changed if the change is supported by approval by the Local Leaguersquos Board of Directors

2 League Structure and its Objectives The basis of Little League Inc is to provide a structured forum through which young baseball players can learn to play competitive baseball in a safe and fun environment To meet those goals the Local League adheres to the guidelines set forth by Little League Inc and is divided into different levels The Local League has four levels ∙ Tee-Ball League ∙ Minor League AA Division ∙ Minor League AAA Division and ∙ Little League (also referred to as the Major League)

The various levels within the overall Local League structure serve different age groups and skill levels Each successive level builds on the experience of the previous year and is generally grouped by player age particularly in the early levels Each successive level stresses a greater degree of individual and team skills with an increasing emphasis on competition at the higher levels Within this overall structure the specific objectives of the Local League are to teach baseball in a safe and fun environment while fielding teams that are competitive both within and in the various post-season tournaments Games are played at all levels and commence on or after Opening Day with the exception of the Major and AAA Leagues which may begin games before opening day

3 At What Level Does a Player Participate There are two basic criteria that help determine at which level an individual player will play ∙ The playerrsquos age and ∙ The playerrsquos perceived skill level

The Local League adheres to the rules established by Little League Inc regarding player age In Little League baseball there is a notion of League Age League Age is determined by each players age as of September 1st of each season A players age on September 1st of each year determines the players age for that Little League season A League Age Chart is posted on the Gibbs Little League Website League Age is an objective criterion that Little League Inc uses to help determine where a player might participate The second criteria each playerrsquos perceived skill level are subjective There is no avoiding the issue that judgments made by the Managers and Coaches may be wrong or may be perceived as biased It happens every year This cannot be totally avoided but as Managers and Coaches we must try to make such evaluations as fairly as possible To assist in the evaluation process the Local League holds an annual skill evaluation for Local League players who are not currently members of a Major League team Generally players League Age 10ndash12 take part in the skill evaluations Following the skill evaluation the Major League conducts its player draft during which the Major League Managers select the number of players required to fill out their player rosters They choose players whom they feel are most qualified to play at the Major League level Following the Major League draft the AAA Division

4

conducts its draft The specifics of each draft are described in greater detail in the sections devoted to each League and the League Player Agent section

4 Responsibilities of the Manager

41 ManagerCoach amp Role Model Managers and Coaches of teams at every level must recognize that the players are children who are at very impressionable ages It is not enough that Managers and Coaches have previous experience in the game Managers and Coaches must possess leadership ability and the know-how to work with young children Training players in the fundamentals of teamwork good sportsmanship and discipline are desirable and attainable goals of the program There is a No Tobacco Use Policy which states that Managers Coaches and other Volunteers may not use tobacco products of any kind while conducting team functions during a game or practice on the field in the dugout or in foul territory

42 Player Safety Player safety must be a primary concern of all Team Managers and Coaches Please review and enforce the guidelines provided in the ASAP Safety Plan George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual for Managers and Coaches

If any player misses 3 consecutive games and or practices during the season not attributable to known family obligations (vacations bereavement etc) heshe will need to present a note from hisher doctor before returning

In the event that a player sustains an injury or illness which in the opinion of the Manager prevents that player from participating in any Local League activity the player shall not be permitted to participate in any future Local League activities unless the parent or guardian of the player signs a written authorization and release on a form approved by the Local League This form is provided at the end of this handbook All such injuries or illnesses shall be reported by the manager to the League Safety Officer who in his sole discretion may require in addition to parental authorization written authorization from a physician before an injured or ill player may resume participation in Local League activities

43 Team Organization It is the League Directorrsquos and Managers responsibility to encourage and select Coaches to assist throughout the season during both practices and games The Manager and at least one Coach should be at every practice and every game unless advance plans are made for two or more Coaches to be present when the Manager is absent Coaches play a critical team role and as Manager the Local League encourages you to enlist 2 or more Coaches to support team operations throughout the season Coaches help with teaching skills by leading and supporting drills during practices and should also demonstrate positive team values Coaches should also consider themselves to be role models and conduct themselves accordingly The Team Manager is responsible for the conduct of his or her Coaches

44 General Responsibilities As a Manager you are primarily a Coach but there are a number of related Team and Local League responsibilities you must also assume These include but are not limited to the following

Helping to maintain and improve the Playing Fields prior to the start of each season as well as prior to and following each game Managers should enlist parents from your team to assist

Notifying the Player Agent and League Director of any roster changes

Obtaining Parental Release for sick or injured players

Informing parents of district qualified players of the proof of residency requirements and collect documents from parents

5

In the event of a violation of the minimum playing time rule the protesting Manager must file a written letter of protest to the League President who with a committee of his choice will determine the action to be taken

Completing Little League Volunteer Form and with the assistance of the League Director ensuring form is completed by all CoachesVolunteers

Maintaining the Playing Fields Inspect the field to ensure it is safe and playable

In the Majors and AAA the Visiting Team must prepare the field for play (rake out each base mound and plate base lines and batterrsquos box)

Ensure that the field is groomed as appropriate for each league to avoid players getting injured

Notify the League Director Field Maintenance Director or Safety Officer if there is a problem with the fields

After every game pick up the area or better yet get the players to pick up after themselves (see Concession Stand Duty below for Home Team game responsibilities when playing at the West Sterling fields)

45 Games Postponed Due to Inclement Weather The Manager of the Home Team makes the decision whether or not a game should be postponed due to inclement weather but must confer with the Visiting Team Manager before making the decision For the Major League and Minor League AAA Division the home team manager will contact the Umpire in Chief to announce the games postponement The playerrsquos safety is absolutely the most important factor Games should be postponed under the conditions defined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual for Managers and Coaches Once the game starts it is the Umpirersquos or Adult Game Coordinatorrsquos call Managers are welcome to offer their suggestions but they are to do so with appropriate courtesy and with the knowledge that it is not ultimately their call If 4 innings have been completed (3frac12 if Home Team is in the lead) the game is considered complete if called due to inclement weather scores are final as of that point no make-up required If less than 4 innings have been played (3frac12 if Home Team is in the lead) the game should be completed at a later date by continuing from the exact point it was stopped subject to substitution and pitching rules in effect the day the game is continued Postponed games should be made up within the same pitching week or if not as soon as possible The two managers should make every effort to schedule a time within the same week including using one of the teamrsquos practice time slots if necessary If an AAA or Major League game cannot be played during the same pitching week the League President will consult with all of the League Managers at the appropriate level and then make a binding decision

46 Team Rosters For liability reasons it is important that you submit your teams roster to the League Director or the Local League Player Agent prior to Opening Day As a member of Little League Inc we purchase all possible medical and liability insurance but that insurance only covers those players Coaches and Managers whose names are submitted to Little League Inc If a players Coachs or Managers name does not appear on our official rosters that person is not covered by our insurance

47 Concession Stand Duty The concession stand at the Rick Maypother Field in West Sterling is an important source of revenue for the League It pays for a large percentage of our annual operating expenses which would otherwise be passed on in increased registration fees To avoid this we require that the concession stand be open for business during each game played on the Rick Maypother Field regardless of which level is having the game

6

It is the responsibility of the Managers in conjunction with the Concession Stand Managers and the League Director to create a concession stand schedule for each of your home games at the Major League field During Major League games the Home Team Manager is responsible for providing Concession Stand coverage The Visiting Team Manager is responsible for all pre-game field preparation During AAA games both teams should provide coverage

5 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League is generally intended for players League Ages 4 to 6 years old League Age 7 may play Tee-Ball on request of a childrsquos parent(s) Its purpose is to introduce each player to baseball and build on the previous years experience This league introduces the concept 1st half to 2nd half progression This is designed to keep the season interesting for the kids and build on existing skills Tee-Ball is based on participation not competition There is a League Director who represents their League on the Local Leaguersquos Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The League Director is responsible for recruiting managerscoaches and working with the Scheduler to schedule practices and games There will be a maximum of two games andor practices per week and a Soft-Tee ball is used during all practices and games (catching and throwing drills may also involve other soft lightweight balls such as a tennis ball) The League Director with the approval of the League President selects managers for each Tee-Ball team Managers should encourage parent participation and seek assistance from those with coaching andor baseball experience It is the role of the Manager and Coaches to encourage each player to participate The players are very young children and generally need some encouragement Every play made during a game or practice is a great play First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored in the equipment box at the field

51 Team Selection Players who participate in Tee-Ball do not take part in a skill assessment and are not subject to a player draft The League Director assigns teams with input from the Managers Parents of players League Age 6 may request that their children play-up by participating at the next higher League level but must have had a full year of Tee-Ball already This is subject to support from the Manager and League Director approval based on subjective skill assessment by the League Managers Parents of players League Age 7 may request that their children play-down by participating at the Tee-Ball level Each team is totally restocked each year and is composed of up to 7 players depending on registrations Team size of approximately 5-6 is generally good at this level because of the relatively short attention span of these young players Teams should be of consistent size within the League but perceived skill level balancing is not required

52 Skills to Teach

521 Skills to Teach 1 Proper hitting technique with the Tee (first half of the season) coach pitch (second half of the season) 2 Throwing technique 3 Catching technique (with and without a glove) 4 Good sportsmanship 5 Basic fielding techniquemdashgrounders and fly balls 6 Base runningmdashwhen to stay when to go 7 Play at first for the first half of the season - Play at correct base for the second half of the season 8 Backup responsibilities 9 SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety

Manual for Managers and Coaches

53 Game Format

531 1 Emphasize fun and sportsmanship

7

2 Game (and practice) times are limited to one hour and a half This should allow time for each team to come up to bat three times in a game Each team will have 15 minutes of practice time on the field before the game begins

3 No score keeping no outs no stealing and no catcher is used 4 Every offensive player has a turn at bat each inning 5 Every defensive player takes a position in the field each inning Positions should approximate regular

baseball fielding positions (no catcher) 6 At Manager discretion players may be rotated into different defensive positions after every 1 or 2 batters

At a minimum players should be rotated into different defensive positions each inning 7 Batters and base runners must wear helmets at all times 8 Runners advance one base 9 Make the play at 1st base after each hit 10 No advancement on over-throws 11 The team at bat should place adults as 1st and 3rd base Coaches to direct the runners 12 The defensive coaches should be on the field coaching the fielders 13 The last batter runs all the bases The defense can only make a play at one base This avoids the ball being

thrown all over the field and potential injuries 14 Coach pitch starts at the half way point of the season However children who do not want to hit from the

coach should be allowed to hit from the Tee if they want Children should also be hitting from the Tee if they do not possess sufficient skill to hit the ball from coach pitch It is recommended that the Tee be used for the first couple of gamespractices to assess the hitting ability of the players on the team

15 After five pitches from the coach the child should be moved to the Tee if they have not had success hitting the ball to keep the game moving

16 During the second half of the season defensive plays to the proper base can be introduced (instead of always at first base) if the team is regularly making plays at first base

6 Minor LeagueAA Division The Minor League AA Division is generally intended for 3rd and 4th year players League Age 7 and 8 years old Its purpose is to introduce each player to baseball build on the previous years experience and introduce defensive tactics The AA Division is based on participation not competition There is a League Director who represents their League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The League Director is responsible for recruiting Managers and Coaches the formation of teams and working with the Scheduler to schedule practices and games There will be two scheduled game(s) andor practice(s) per week A Soft RIF ball is used during all practices and games Coaches are encouraged to interrupt the game to teach proper game plays and rules The League Director with the approval of the League President selects managers for each AA Division team Managers should encourage parent participation and seek assistance from those with coaching andor baseball experience It is the role of the Manager and Coaches to encourage each player to participate The players are very young children and generally need some encouragement Every play made during a game or practice is a great play First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field

61 Team Selection Teams are created by the AA League Director Players who are League age 7 do not participate in the League skill assessment Players who are League age 8 may take part in the AAA League skill assessment organized by the League Player Agent and are possibly drafted by the AAA Division The League Director assigns teams with input from the Managers Each team is totally restocked each year and is composed of up to 9 players depending on registrations Team size of approximately 8-9 is generally good at this level because of the relatively short attention span of these young players The AA League Director will try to ensure that the teams are evenly balanced The eligible children of each AA League Manager are automatically assigned to their parents team

8

62 Skills to Teach

1 The proper hitting technique 2 The proper throwing technique

3 The proper catching technique

4 The proper pitching technique

5 Good sportsmanship and teamwork 6 The proper fielding technique grounders and fly balls 7 Base running when to stay when to go how many bases to advance

8 Play at correct base concept of force out primary and secondary plays

9 Backup responsibilities

10 Throw from outfield using the relay

11 Safety Please review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the ldquoSafety Manual for Managers and

Coaches

12 Hustle and good attitude give your best effort

13 Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

63 Game Format

631 1St Half of the Season

1 Emphasize fun good sportsmanship and teamwork

2 Player Appearance - All players shall have their shirts tucked in and hats on forward

3 Field Setup

a Bases shall be set 50rsquo apart

b The Pitching Machine shall be set 46rsquo from Homeplate (this may need small adjustments throughout the game)

c Pitching Machine Setting i Power Pedal - 2

ii Release Arm - 4 iii Micro Adjustment Arm - 3

d Player pitchers shall pitch from 41rsquo from Homeplate at the pitching rubber

4 Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day Game (and practice) times

are limited to 90 minutes This should allow time for each team to come up to bat three to four times in a game

9

a Games will be played for 90 minutes The goal is to play as many innings as possible within the

90-minute time frame There is a hard stop at the 90-minute mark No score keeping no stealing

b The first pitch of the game will be thrown at the game start time indicated on the schedule Any warm ups shall be conducted prior to game time

5 Each team will dress and play a catcher

6 Each team will have a set batting order every game The order shall not change each inning

7 On defense we will count the number of ldquofieldedrdquo outs Inning will end if the defense successfully records

3 outs (strikeouts donrsquot count) or the offensive teams bats through the entire lineup once

8 Offensive Coach will utilize a pitching machine supplied by the League to throw consistent strikes to the batters If the player does not get a hit after 5 swings the Offensive Coach is REQUIRED to have the hitter use a batting tee to hit the ball No exceptions in terms of surpassing 5 swings or not using the tee The game needs to be kept moving in an efficient manner

9 Every defensive player takes a position in the field each inning Positions should approximate regular

baseball fielding positions Defensive players should rotate positions each inning

10 Batters and base runners MUST wear helmets Protective cups are encouraged but not required However any player who wants to play Catcher is required to wear a protective cup

11 Runners advance one base on infield hits On hits to the outfield runners advance on coachrsquos discretion

but must stop when the ball is returned to the infield

12 Make play at correct base after each hit the runner is retired if he or she is out

13 No advancement on over-throws

14 Get the ball to the playerpitcher after each playmdashCoach gets overthrows

15 The offense should place adults as 1st and 3rd base Coaches to direct the runners

16 The defensive Coaches should be on the field coaching the defense

17 The last batter advances normallymdashone base on infield hit multiple bases if hit to the outfield The last batter does NOT circle the bases (for the sake of doing so) like the T-Ball kids do

18 Throw from outfield using the relay

632 2nd Half of the Season

1 TEES ARE NOT ALLOWED IN THE SECOND HALF OF THE SEASON

2 If both Managers agree prior to a start of a game then a player from each team will pitch each inning

a In the AA Division we want to introduce batters to player pitching but if a AA League Manager does not have players (s)he feels can or should pitch the two opposing Managers can decide before the game that players pitch for only 1 inning or 2 innings and the rest of the game can be pitched via the Pitching Machine The safety of the players is the most important aspect of any game

10

b If a team determines that they do not have a player pitcher then batters get a maximum of 5

swings off of the pitching machine The 3 missing player pitches are eliminated from the at bat

3 The rules for Kid Pitching in AA

a Only kids who can throw reasonably accurately are allowed to pitch and if needed they are allowed to pitch from an area slightly closer to home plate (as long as itrsquos safe for the batter)

b Kid pitchers will throw a MAXIMUM of 3 pitches per hitter If the ball is not put in play the coach steps in to use the Pitching Machine and the batter is given hisher usual 5 swings

c If a batter is unsuccessful after 3 kid pitches and 5 pitching machine pitches then they are declared out by strikeout

d The Pitching Machine should be set up on Pitcherrsquos Mound and ready to go on the field during the 2nd half of the season to insure a speedy transition from ldquokid pitchrdquo to ldquomachine pitchrdquo if no contact is made after the 3 kid pitches

4 A 5th swing foul is not an out The at-bat will continue until the ball is hit in to play or a 5th or subsequent

pitch is missed

7 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division is generally intended for players League Age 9ndash12 years old The AAA Division is more competitive than AA Division but its focus is still on instruction and participation It is intended to teach more refined team play with a greater emphasis on developing individual skills Each team is composed of 11 to 13 players along with one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches Scores are kept Each team plays 10-15 games two to three games a week Games are 6 innings long An official Little League Baseball is used for all practices and games The AAA League Director represents the AAA League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The AAA League Director with the approval of the League President selects Managers for the AAA League Managing in the AAA Division is not easy because of the range of age and talent in the players Players as young as 8 are eligible to play in the AAA Division while players as old as 11 (and if a parent requests as old as 12) may still be playing in the AAA League With such a mix you have the potential of physically bigger players playing against significantly smaller players This is compounded by the fact that some of the 8 and 9 year olds may be considered the most talented players in their age group while some of the older players are likely to have been passed over in the Major League draft one or more times Because of this it is important that the AAA Division Manager be aware of possible bruised egos and hurt feelings on the part of some players andor their parents The AAA Division is a more competitive League than the AA Division and the Manager should not be expected to give preferential treatment to any player but the Manager should be aware that such feelings might exist and therefore should emphasize and recognize positive play and attitude Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

1 Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

2 Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

11

3 BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

4 The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

5 Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules

6 Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

7 Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League Baseball

which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

8 Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

9 Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

10 Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will

inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

11 All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field

until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

Each AAA team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field 71 Team Selection Each AAA Division team is totally restocked each year Players are not carried on the same roster from one year to the next AAA League teams are selected in a player draft and all eligible players are required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the Player Agent It is the responsibility of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent to supervise the AAA League draft in an attempt to distribute the players into evenly balanced teams The draft may be run in accordance with the Method in First Year of OperationmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo In order to fulfill the age and skill requirements the AAA Division must conduct its draft in the following manner

1 Eligible children of the AAA managers are automatically assigned to their parents team This provision is considered the written option required by Little League A manager may request to waive this option in writing before the draft starts The order for each round will be determined by the total score of drafted players through the most recently completed round

2 Each team on the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent should have an equal number of players assigned to their roster who are considered viable pitchers (the Managers child could fulfill part of this requirement) Note that 12 year olds cannot pitch in the AAA Division

12

3 On the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent the 9 10 11 and 12-year-old players who were not previously selected in the Major League draft should be drafted on a round-by-round basis Note all 10ndash12 year old players not selected in the Major League draft and all 9 years old players must be drafted into the AAA League at this time 9 years old players can play down in AA if requested by a parent or at the recommendation of the AAA League Director

4 Finally if any roster spots are still available after the 9ndash12 year old players have been selected on the recommendations of the AAA Division Director and the League Player Agent 8 year old players who are considered skilled enough and who have requested to play at the AAA Division level can be drafted

Note that the Local League requires that if a Major League player misses more than three consecutive games due to illness or injury that players team must fill that roster spot with the highest rated eligible player from the Player Agentrsquos list of eligible players in the AAA Division This generally occurs at least once a year This allows the possibility of an 11 year old who may have been overlooked in the draft to be called up to the Major League during the season See player agent section for more details 72 Skills to Teach In AAA Division the Manager and Coaches teach baseball fundamentals with an emphasis on more refined team play and individual skills

1 Team skills and practices to teach

a How a defensive team functions as a whole The role each defensive player has in basics defensive plays an infield grounder to the right side of the infield to the left side of the infield pop flies to left to center to right etc

b SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual (ASAP Plan) for Managers and Coaches

2 Individual skills and practices to teach

a The batter should not turn their head when facing a pitch

b Proper throwing technique use a crow hop to set the feet throw across the body etc

c How to run the bases make a wide turn on a walk cut the base on an extra base hit stealing a

base

d How to field a grounder use two hands come up in proper throwing position

e How to track and catch a fly ball catch the ball with two hands over the head use crossover steps to run back

f How a catcher should block a bad pitch throwing out base runner on a steal

g Pitching throw strikes not speed

h Good sportsmanship

i Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

j Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day

13

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season

1 Scorebooks are kept by each team but statistics should be kept to a minimum with no posting of individual results All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside the dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to the player attempting to make a play on the ball)

2 9 players take defensive positions in the field for each inning but all players are included in each teams batting order for the entire game

3 Minimum Playing Time rules in AAA

a 12 Player Roster (or fewer) on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

b 13 Player Roster on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) 1 Exception

a Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

b The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

c Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

4 Every player is required to play at least two (2) innings (6 outs) in the infield per game unless a legitimate

safety concern is raised by the player or coach

a Free substitution is allowed except for the pitcher Once a pitcher has been removed from the mound they may not pitch again during that game

5 Players may not play the same defensive position including pitcher and catcher positions for more than 3

innings a game

a If a player plays a position for 1 pitch in an inning it counts as an inning Example A pitcher enters the game in the 4th inning with 2 outs and throws 1 pitch to record the final outhellipthat counts as 1 inning pitched

6 Each team bats until the defensive team gets three outs or 4 runs are scored No more than 4 runs are

scored in an inning Example 3 runs are already in and the bases are loaded The batter hits a home run Only the 4th run is counted The other three runs do not count

7 Batters get 3 strikes or walk on 4 balls

14

8 Bunting is allowed during the entire season

9 No leading is allowed

10 Stealing is allowed

a Stealing of home plate is only allowed with two outs

i If a runner steals home with less than two outs and is tagged out prior to crossing the plate the runner is out

ii If the runner successfully crosses the plate without being tagged they will be sent back to third base with no out recorded

11 Stealing is allowed one base at a time The catcher is encouraged to throw the ball and attempt to throw out

the base runner The runner(s) cannot advance any additional bases on a wild throw by the catcher or an error by the fielder

12 After a walk the batter may not automatically advance to 2nd base (even if ball 4 goes to the backstop) If a walk occurs the batter is only entitled to 1st base

13 The play is complete and all runners must stop when the defense possesses the ball at the base in front of the lead runner

a If the runner is in progress to the base they must decide quickly whether to continue or go back Runners may not taunt or otherwise bait throws Failure of the runners to quickly make a decision andor the appearance of trying to bait a throw will result in the following

i First Occurrence Warning to the Manager and bench of offensive team

ii Subsequent Occurrences The lead runner will be called out and must return to the

bench

b If the ball is at the same base as the lead runner the lead runner must stop

c If the ball is at a base which is behind the lead runner (ie lead runner is at second and the ball is at first) the runner can continue

d If there are two base runners (say 1st and 3rd) and the ball is at the base in front of the lead runner (ie home) the following runner can continue to second base at hisher risk

14 Runners may not advance on overthrows back to the pitcher

15 Runners may advance one base on overthrows that go out of play

16 The manager is allowed to use coaches or players as base coaches

17 A new inning cannot be started after 120 minutes from the start of the game

a The start of a new inning is when the defensive team takes the field

18 Warm-up time between innings should be minimized in order to get games completed within the scheduled

time

a When possible players who are expected to play Catcher the following half inning should get their catcherrsquos gear on and be ready to take the field once their team is retired

15

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

conducts its draft The specifics of each draft are described in greater detail in the sections devoted to each League and the League Player Agent section

4 Responsibilities of the Manager

41 ManagerCoach amp Role Model Managers and Coaches of teams at every level must recognize that the players are children who are at very impressionable ages It is not enough that Managers and Coaches have previous experience in the game Managers and Coaches must possess leadership ability and the know-how to work with young children Training players in the fundamentals of teamwork good sportsmanship and discipline are desirable and attainable goals of the program There is a No Tobacco Use Policy which states that Managers Coaches and other Volunteers may not use tobacco products of any kind while conducting team functions during a game or practice on the field in the dugout or in foul territory

42 Player Safety Player safety must be a primary concern of all Team Managers and Coaches Please review and enforce the guidelines provided in the ASAP Safety Plan George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual for Managers and Coaches

If any player misses 3 consecutive games and or practices during the season not attributable to known family obligations (vacations bereavement etc) heshe will need to present a note from hisher doctor before returning

In the event that a player sustains an injury or illness which in the opinion of the Manager prevents that player from participating in any Local League activity the player shall not be permitted to participate in any future Local League activities unless the parent or guardian of the player signs a written authorization and release on a form approved by the Local League This form is provided at the end of this handbook All such injuries or illnesses shall be reported by the manager to the League Safety Officer who in his sole discretion may require in addition to parental authorization written authorization from a physician before an injured or ill player may resume participation in Local League activities

43 Team Organization It is the League Directorrsquos and Managers responsibility to encourage and select Coaches to assist throughout the season during both practices and games The Manager and at least one Coach should be at every practice and every game unless advance plans are made for two or more Coaches to be present when the Manager is absent Coaches play a critical team role and as Manager the Local League encourages you to enlist 2 or more Coaches to support team operations throughout the season Coaches help with teaching skills by leading and supporting drills during practices and should also demonstrate positive team values Coaches should also consider themselves to be role models and conduct themselves accordingly The Team Manager is responsible for the conduct of his or her Coaches

44 General Responsibilities As a Manager you are primarily a Coach but there are a number of related Team and Local League responsibilities you must also assume These include but are not limited to the following

Helping to maintain and improve the Playing Fields prior to the start of each season as well as prior to and following each game Managers should enlist parents from your team to assist

Notifying the Player Agent and League Director of any roster changes

Obtaining Parental Release for sick or injured players

Informing parents of district qualified players of the proof of residency requirements and collect documents from parents

5

In the event of a violation of the minimum playing time rule the protesting Manager must file a written letter of protest to the League President who with a committee of his choice will determine the action to be taken

Completing Little League Volunteer Form and with the assistance of the League Director ensuring form is completed by all CoachesVolunteers

Maintaining the Playing Fields Inspect the field to ensure it is safe and playable

In the Majors and AAA the Visiting Team must prepare the field for play (rake out each base mound and plate base lines and batterrsquos box)

Ensure that the field is groomed as appropriate for each league to avoid players getting injured

Notify the League Director Field Maintenance Director or Safety Officer if there is a problem with the fields

After every game pick up the area or better yet get the players to pick up after themselves (see Concession Stand Duty below for Home Team game responsibilities when playing at the West Sterling fields)

45 Games Postponed Due to Inclement Weather The Manager of the Home Team makes the decision whether or not a game should be postponed due to inclement weather but must confer with the Visiting Team Manager before making the decision For the Major League and Minor League AAA Division the home team manager will contact the Umpire in Chief to announce the games postponement The playerrsquos safety is absolutely the most important factor Games should be postponed under the conditions defined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual for Managers and Coaches Once the game starts it is the Umpirersquos or Adult Game Coordinatorrsquos call Managers are welcome to offer their suggestions but they are to do so with appropriate courtesy and with the knowledge that it is not ultimately their call If 4 innings have been completed (3frac12 if Home Team is in the lead) the game is considered complete if called due to inclement weather scores are final as of that point no make-up required If less than 4 innings have been played (3frac12 if Home Team is in the lead) the game should be completed at a later date by continuing from the exact point it was stopped subject to substitution and pitching rules in effect the day the game is continued Postponed games should be made up within the same pitching week or if not as soon as possible The two managers should make every effort to schedule a time within the same week including using one of the teamrsquos practice time slots if necessary If an AAA or Major League game cannot be played during the same pitching week the League President will consult with all of the League Managers at the appropriate level and then make a binding decision

46 Team Rosters For liability reasons it is important that you submit your teams roster to the League Director or the Local League Player Agent prior to Opening Day As a member of Little League Inc we purchase all possible medical and liability insurance but that insurance only covers those players Coaches and Managers whose names are submitted to Little League Inc If a players Coachs or Managers name does not appear on our official rosters that person is not covered by our insurance

47 Concession Stand Duty The concession stand at the Rick Maypother Field in West Sterling is an important source of revenue for the League It pays for a large percentage of our annual operating expenses which would otherwise be passed on in increased registration fees To avoid this we require that the concession stand be open for business during each game played on the Rick Maypother Field regardless of which level is having the game

6

It is the responsibility of the Managers in conjunction with the Concession Stand Managers and the League Director to create a concession stand schedule for each of your home games at the Major League field During Major League games the Home Team Manager is responsible for providing Concession Stand coverage The Visiting Team Manager is responsible for all pre-game field preparation During AAA games both teams should provide coverage

5 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League is generally intended for players League Ages 4 to 6 years old League Age 7 may play Tee-Ball on request of a childrsquos parent(s) Its purpose is to introduce each player to baseball and build on the previous years experience This league introduces the concept 1st half to 2nd half progression This is designed to keep the season interesting for the kids and build on existing skills Tee-Ball is based on participation not competition There is a League Director who represents their League on the Local Leaguersquos Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The League Director is responsible for recruiting managerscoaches and working with the Scheduler to schedule practices and games There will be a maximum of two games andor practices per week and a Soft-Tee ball is used during all practices and games (catching and throwing drills may also involve other soft lightweight balls such as a tennis ball) The League Director with the approval of the League President selects managers for each Tee-Ball team Managers should encourage parent participation and seek assistance from those with coaching andor baseball experience It is the role of the Manager and Coaches to encourage each player to participate The players are very young children and generally need some encouragement Every play made during a game or practice is a great play First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored in the equipment box at the field

51 Team Selection Players who participate in Tee-Ball do not take part in a skill assessment and are not subject to a player draft The League Director assigns teams with input from the Managers Parents of players League Age 6 may request that their children play-up by participating at the next higher League level but must have had a full year of Tee-Ball already This is subject to support from the Manager and League Director approval based on subjective skill assessment by the League Managers Parents of players League Age 7 may request that their children play-down by participating at the Tee-Ball level Each team is totally restocked each year and is composed of up to 7 players depending on registrations Team size of approximately 5-6 is generally good at this level because of the relatively short attention span of these young players Teams should be of consistent size within the League but perceived skill level balancing is not required

52 Skills to Teach

521 Skills to Teach 1 Proper hitting technique with the Tee (first half of the season) coach pitch (second half of the season) 2 Throwing technique 3 Catching technique (with and without a glove) 4 Good sportsmanship 5 Basic fielding techniquemdashgrounders and fly balls 6 Base runningmdashwhen to stay when to go 7 Play at first for the first half of the season - Play at correct base for the second half of the season 8 Backup responsibilities 9 SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety

Manual for Managers and Coaches

53 Game Format

531 1 Emphasize fun and sportsmanship

7

2 Game (and practice) times are limited to one hour and a half This should allow time for each team to come up to bat three times in a game Each team will have 15 minutes of practice time on the field before the game begins

3 No score keeping no outs no stealing and no catcher is used 4 Every offensive player has a turn at bat each inning 5 Every defensive player takes a position in the field each inning Positions should approximate regular

baseball fielding positions (no catcher) 6 At Manager discretion players may be rotated into different defensive positions after every 1 or 2 batters

At a minimum players should be rotated into different defensive positions each inning 7 Batters and base runners must wear helmets at all times 8 Runners advance one base 9 Make the play at 1st base after each hit 10 No advancement on over-throws 11 The team at bat should place adults as 1st and 3rd base Coaches to direct the runners 12 The defensive coaches should be on the field coaching the fielders 13 The last batter runs all the bases The defense can only make a play at one base This avoids the ball being

thrown all over the field and potential injuries 14 Coach pitch starts at the half way point of the season However children who do not want to hit from the

coach should be allowed to hit from the Tee if they want Children should also be hitting from the Tee if they do not possess sufficient skill to hit the ball from coach pitch It is recommended that the Tee be used for the first couple of gamespractices to assess the hitting ability of the players on the team

15 After five pitches from the coach the child should be moved to the Tee if they have not had success hitting the ball to keep the game moving

16 During the second half of the season defensive plays to the proper base can be introduced (instead of always at first base) if the team is regularly making plays at first base

6 Minor LeagueAA Division The Minor League AA Division is generally intended for 3rd and 4th year players League Age 7 and 8 years old Its purpose is to introduce each player to baseball build on the previous years experience and introduce defensive tactics The AA Division is based on participation not competition There is a League Director who represents their League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The League Director is responsible for recruiting Managers and Coaches the formation of teams and working with the Scheduler to schedule practices and games There will be two scheduled game(s) andor practice(s) per week A Soft RIF ball is used during all practices and games Coaches are encouraged to interrupt the game to teach proper game plays and rules The League Director with the approval of the League President selects managers for each AA Division team Managers should encourage parent participation and seek assistance from those with coaching andor baseball experience It is the role of the Manager and Coaches to encourage each player to participate The players are very young children and generally need some encouragement Every play made during a game or practice is a great play First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field

61 Team Selection Teams are created by the AA League Director Players who are League age 7 do not participate in the League skill assessment Players who are League age 8 may take part in the AAA League skill assessment organized by the League Player Agent and are possibly drafted by the AAA Division The League Director assigns teams with input from the Managers Each team is totally restocked each year and is composed of up to 9 players depending on registrations Team size of approximately 8-9 is generally good at this level because of the relatively short attention span of these young players The AA League Director will try to ensure that the teams are evenly balanced The eligible children of each AA League Manager are automatically assigned to their parents team

8

62 Skills to Teach

1 The proper hitting technique 2 The proper throwing technique

3 The proper catching technique

4 The proper pitching technique

5 Good sportsmanship and teamwork 6 The proper fielding technique grounders and fly balls 7 Base running when to stay when to go how many bases to advance

8 Play at correct base concept of force out primary and secondary plays

9 Backup responsibilities

10 Throw from outfield using the relay

11 Safety Please review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the ldquoSafety Manual for Managers and

Coaches

12 Hustle and good attitude give your best effort

13 Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

63 Game Format

631 1St Half of the Season

1 Emphasize fun good sportsmanship and teamwork

2 Player Appearance - All players shall have their shirts tucked in and hats on forward

3 Field Setup

a Bases shall be set 50rsquo apart

b The Pitching Machine shall be set 46rsquo from Homeplate (this may need small adjustments throughout the game)

c Pitching Machine Setting i Power Pedal - 2

ii Release Arm - 4 iii Micro Adjustment Arm - 3

d Player pitchers shall pitch from 41rsquo from Homeplate at the pitching rubber

4 Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day Game (and practice) times

are limited to 90 minutes This should allow time for each team to come up to bat three to four times in a game

9

a Games will be played for 90 minutes The goal is to play as many innings as possible within the

90-minute time frame There is a hard stop at the 90-minute mark No score keeping no stealing

b The first pitch of the game will be thrown at the game start time indicated on the schedule Any warm ups shall be conducted prior to game time

5 Each team will dress and play a catcher

6 Each team will have a set batting order every game The order shall not change each inning

7 On defense we will count the number of ldquofieldedrdquo outs Inning will end if the defense successfully records

3 outs (strikeouts donrsquot count) or the offensive teams bats through the entire lineup once

8 Offensive Coach will utilize a pitching machine supplied by the League to throw consistent strikes to the batters If the player does not get a hit after 5 swings the Offensive Coach is REQUIRED to have the hitter use a batting tee to hit the ball No exceptions in terms of surpassing 5 swings or not using the tee The game needs to be kept moving in an efficient manner

9 Every defensive player takes a position in the field each inning Positions should approximate regular

baseball fielding positions Defensive players should rotate positions each inning

10 Batters and base runners MUST wear helmets Protective cups are encouraged but not required However any player who wants to play Catcher is required to wear a protective cup

11 Runners advance one base on infield hits On hits to the outfield runners advance on coachrsquos discretion

but must stop when the ball is returned to the infield

12 Make play at correct base after each hit the runner is retired if he or she is out

13 No advancement on over-throws

14 Get the ball to the playerpitcher after each playmdashCoach gets overthrows

15 The offense should place adults as 1st and 3rd base Coaches to direct the runners

16 The defensive Coaches should be on the field coaching the defense

17 The last batter advances normallymdashone base on infield hit multiple bases if hit to the outfield The last batter does NOT circle the bases (for the sake of doing so) like the T-Ball kids do

18 Throw from outfield using the relay

632 2nd Half of the Season

1 TEES ARE NOT ALLOWED IN THE SECOND HALF OF THE SEASON

2 If both Managers agree prior to a start of a game then a player from each team will pitch each inning

a In the AA Division we want to introduce batters to player pitching but if a AA League Manager does not have players (s)he feels can or should pitch the two opposing Managers can decide before the game that players pitch for only 1 inning or 2 innings and the rest of the game can be pitched via the Pitching Machine The safety of the players is the most important aspect of any game

10

b If a team determines that they do not have a player pitcher then batters get a maximum of 5

swings off of the pitching machine The 3 missing player pitches are eliminated from the at bat

3 The rules for Kid Pitching in AA

a Only kids who can throw reasonably accurately are allowed to pitch and if needed they are allowed to pitch from an area slightly closer to home plate (as long as itrsquos safe for the batter)

b Kid pitchers will throw a MAXIMUM of 3 pitches per hitter If the ball is not put in play the coach steps in to use the Pitching Machine and the batter is given hisher usual 5 swings

c If a batter is unsuccessful after 3 kid pitches and 5 pitching machine pitches then they are declared out by strikeout

d The Pitching Machine should be set up on Pitcherrsquos Mound and ready to go on the field during the 2nd half of the season to insure a speedy transition from ldquokid pitchrdquo to ldquomachine pitchrdquo if no contact is made after the 3 kid pitches

4 A 5th swing foul is not an out The at-bat will continue until the ball is hit in to play or a 5th or subsequent

pitch is missed

7 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division is generally intended for players League Age 9ndash12 years old The AAA Division is more competitive than AA Division but its focus is still on instruction and participation It is intended to teach more refined team play with a greater emphasis on developing individual skills Each team is composed of 11 to 13 players along with one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches Scores are kept Each team plays 10-15 games two to three games a week Games are 6 innings long An official Little League Baseball is used for all practices and games The AAA League Director represents the AAA League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The AAA League Director with the approval of the League President selects Managers for the AAA League Managing in the AAA Division is not easy because of the range of age and talent in the players Players as young as 8 are eligible to play in the AAA Division while players as old as 11 (and if a parent requests as old as 12) may still be playing in the AAA League With such a mix you have the potential of physically bigger players playing against significantly smaller players This is compounded by the fact that some of the 8 and 9 year olds may be considered the most talented players in their age group while some of the older players are likely to have been passed over in the Major League draft one or more times Because of this it is important that the AAA Division Manager be aware of possible bruised egos and hurt feelings on the part of some players andor their parents The AAA Division is a more competitive League than the AA Division and the Manager should not be expected to give preferential treatment to any player but the Manager should be aware that such feelings might exist and therefore should emphasize and recognize positive play and attitude Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

1 Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

2 Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

11

3 BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

4 The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

5 Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules

6 Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

7 Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League Baseball

which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

8 Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

9 Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

10 Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will

inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

11 All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field

until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

Each AAA team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field 71 Team Selection Each AAA Division team is totally restocked each year Players are not carried on the same roster from one year to the next AAA League teams are selected in a player draft and all eligible players are required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the Player Agent It is the responsibility of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent to supervise the AAA League draft in an attempt to distribute the players into evenly balanced teams The draft may be run in accordance with the Method in First Year of OperationmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo In order to fulfill the age and skill requirements the AAA Division must conduct its draft in the following manner

1 Eligible children of the AAA managers are automatically assigned to their parents team This provision is considered the written option required by Little League A manager may request to waive this option in writing before the draft starts The order for each round will be determined by the total score of drafted players through the most recently completed round

2 Each team on the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent should have an equal number of players assigned to their roster who are considered viable pitchers (the Managers child could fulfill part of this requirement) Note that 12 year olds cannot pitch in the AAA Division

12

3 On the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent the 9 10 11 and 12-year-old players who were not previously selected in the Major League draft should be drafted on a round-by-round basis Note all 10ndash12 year old players not selected in the Major League draft and all 9 years old players must be drafted into the AAA League at this time 9 years old players can play down in AA if requested by a parent or at the recommendation of the AAA League Director

4 Finally if any roster spots are still available after the 9ndash12 year old players have been selected on the recommendations of the AAA Division Director and the League Player Agent 8 year old players who are considered skilled enough and who have requested to play at the AAA Division level can be drafted

Note that the Local League requires that if a Major League player misses more than three consecutive games due to illness or injury that players team must fill that roster spot with the highest rated eligible player from the Player Agentrsquos list of eligible players in the AAA Division This generally occurs at least once a year This allows the possibility of an 11 year old who may have been overlooked in the draft to be called up to the Major League during the season See player agent section for more details 72 Skills to Teach In AAA Division the Manager and Coaches teach baseball fundamentals with an emphasis on more refined team play and individual skills

1 Team skills and practices to teach

a How a defensive team functions as a whole The role each defensive player has in basics defensive plays an infield grounder to the right side of the infield to the left side of the infield pop flies to left to center to right etc

b SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual (ASAP Plan) for Managers and Coaches

2 Individual skills and practices to teach

a The batter should not turn their head when facing a pitch

b Proper throwing technique use a crow hop to set the feet throw across the body etc

c How to run the bases make a wide turn on a walk cut the base on an extra base hit stealing a

base

d How to field a grounder use two hands come up in proper throwing position

e How to track and catch a fly ball catch the ball with two hands over the head use crossover steps to run back

f How a catcher should block a bad pitch throwing out base runner on a steal

g Pitching throw strikes not speed

h Good sportsmanship

i Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

j Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day

13

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season

1 Scorebooks are kept by each team but statistics should be kept to a minimum with no posting of individual results All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside the dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to the player attempting to make a play on the ball)

2 9 players take defensive positions in the field for each inning but all players are included in each teams batting order for the entire game

3 Minimum Playing Time rules in AAA

a 12 Player Roster (or fewer) on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

b 13 Player Roster on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) 1 Exception

a Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

b The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

c Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

4 Every player is required to play at least two (2) innings (6 outs) in the infield per game unless a legitimate

safety concern is raised by the player or coach

a Free substitution is allowed except for the pitcher Once a pitcher has been removed from the mound they may not pitch again during that game

5 Players may not play the same defensive position including pitcher and catcher positions for more than 3

innings a game

a If a player plays a position for 1 pitch in an inning it counts as an inning Example A pitcher enters the game in the 4th inning with 2 outs and throws 1 pitch to record the final outhellipthat counts as 1 inning pitched

6 Each team bats until the defensive team gets three outs or 4 runs are scored No more than 4 runs are

scored in an inning Example 3 runs are already in and the bases are loaded The batter hits a home run Only the 4th run is counted The other three runs do not count

7 Batters get 3 strikes or walk on 4 balls

14

8 Bunting is allowed during the entire season

9 No leading is allowed

10 Stealing is allowed

a Stealing of home plate is only allowed with two outs

i If a runner steals home with less than two outs and is tagged out prior to crossing the plate the runner is out

ii If the runner successfully crosses the plate without being tagged they will be sent back to third base with no out recorded

11 Stealing is allowed one base at a time The catcher is encouraged to throw the ball and attempt to throw out

the base runner The runner(s) cannot advance any additional bases on a wild throw by the catcher or an error by the fielder

12 After a walk the batter may not automatically advance to 2nd base (even if ball 4 goes to the backstop) If a walk occurs the batter is only entitled to 1st base

13 The play is complete and all runners must stop when the defense possesses the ball at the base in front of the lead runner

a If the runner is in progress to the base they must decide quickly whether to continue or go back Runners may not taunt or otherwise bait throws Failure of the runners to quickly make a decision andor the appearance of trying to bait a throw will result in the following

i First Occurrence Warning to the Manager and bench of offensive team

ii Subsequent Occurrences The lead runner will be called out and must return to the

bench

b If the ball is at the same base as the lead runner the lead runner must stop

c If the ball is at a base which is behind the lead runner (ie lead runner is at second and the ball is at first) the runner can continue

d If there are two base runners (say 1st and 3rd) and the ball is at the base in front of the lead runner (ie home) the following runner can continue to second base at hisher risk

14 Runners may not advance on overthrows back to the pitcher

15 Runners may advance one base on overthrows that go out of play

16 The manager is allowed to use coaches or players as base coaches

17 A new inning cannot be started after 120 minutes from the start of the game

a The start of a new inning is when the defensive team takes the field

18 Warm-up time between innings should be minimized in order to get games completed within the scheduled

time

a When possible players who are expected to play Catcher the following half inning should get their catcherrsquos gear on and be ready to take the field once their team is retired

15

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

In the event of a violation of the minimum playing time rule the protesting Manager must file a written letter of protest to the League President who with a committee of his choice will determine the action to be taken

Completing Little League Volunteer Form and with the assistance of the League Director ensuring form is completed by all CoachesVolunteers

Maintaining the Playing Fields Inspect the field to ensure it is safe and playable

In the Majors and AAA the Visiting Team must prepare the field for play (rake out each base mound and plate base lines and batterrsquos box)

Ensure that the field is groomed as appropriate for each league to avoid players getting injured

Notify the League Director Field Maintenance Director or Safety Officer if there is a problem with the fields

After every game pick up the area or better yet get the players to pick up after themselves (see Concession Stand Duty below for Home Team game responsibilities when playing at the West Sterling fields)

45 Games Postponed Due to Inclement Weather The Manager of the Home Team makes the decision whether or not a game should be postponed due to inclement weather but must confer with the Visiting Team Manager before making the decision For the Major League and Minor League AAA Division the home team manager will contact the Umpire in Chief to announce the games postponement The playerrsquos safety is absolutely the most important factor Games should be postponed under the conditions defined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual for Managers and Coaches Once the game starts it is the Umpirersquos or Adult Game Coordinatorrsquos call Managers are welcome to offer their suggestions but they are to do so with appropriate courtesy and with the knowledge that it is not ultimately their call If 4 innings have been completed (3frac12 if Home Team is in the lead) the game is considered complete if called due to inclement weather scores are final as of that point no make-up required If less than 4 innings have been played (3frac12 if Home Team is in the lead) the game should be completed at a later date by continuing from the exact point it was stopped subject to substitution and pitching rules in effect the day the game is continued Postponed games should be made up within the same pitching week or if not as soon as possible The two managers should make every effort to schedule a time within the same week including using one of the teamrsquos practice time slots if necessary If an AAA or Major League game cannot be played during the same pitching week the League President will consult with all of the League Managers at the appropriate level and then make a binding decision

46 Team Rosters For liability reasons it is important that you submit your teams roster to the League Director or the Local League Player Agent prior to Opening Day As a member of Little League Inc we purchase all possible medical and liability insurance but that insurance only covers those players Coaches and Managers whose names are submitted to Little League Inc If a players Coachs or Managers name does not appear on our official rosters that person is not covered by our insurance

47 Concession Stand Duty The concession stand at the Rick Maypother Field in West Sterling is an important source of revenue for the League It pays for a large percentage of our annual operating expenses which would otherwise be passed on in increased registration fees To avoid this we require that the concession stand be open for business during each game played on the Rick Maypother Field regardless of which level is having the game

6

It is the responsibility of the Managers in conjunction with the Concession Stand Managers and the League Director to create a concession stand schedule for each of your home games at the Major League field During Major League games the Home Team Manager is responsible for providing Concession Stand coverage The Visiting Team Manager is responsible for all pre-game field preparation During AAA games both teams should provide coverage

5 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League is generally intended for players League Ages 4 to 6 years old League Age 7 may play Tee-Ball on request of a childrsquos parent(s) Its purpose is to introduce each player to baseball and build on the previous years experience This league introduces the concept 1st half to 2nd half progression This is designed to keep the season interesting for the kids and build on existing skills Tee-Ball is based on participation not competition There is a League Director who represents their League on the Local Leaguersquos Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The League Director is responsible for recruiting managerscoaches and working with the Scheduler to schedule practices and games There will be a maximum of two games andor practices per week and a Soft-Tee ball is used during all practices and games (catching and throwing drills may also involve other soft lightweight balls such as a tennis ball) The League Director with the approval of the League President selects managers for each Tee-Ball team Managers should encourage parent participation and seek assistance from those with coaching andor baseball experience It is the role of the Manager and Coaches to encourage each player to participate The players are very young children and generally need some encouragement Every play made during a game or practice is a great play First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored in the equipment box at the field

51 Team Selection Players who participate in Tee-Ball do not take part in a skill assessment and are not subject to a player draft The League Director assigns teams with input from the Managers Parents of players League Age 6 may request that their children play-up by participating at the next higher League level but must have had a full year of Tee-Ball already This is subject to support from the Manager and League Director approval based on subjective skill assessment by the League Managers Parents of players League Age 7 may request that their children play-down by participating at the Tee-Ball level Each team is totally restocked each year and is composed of up to 7 players depending on registrations Team size of approximately 5-6 is generally good at this level because of the relatively short attention span of these young players Teams should be of consistent size within the League but perceived skill level balancing is not required

52 Skills to Teach

521 Skills to Teach 1 Proper hitting technique with the Tee (first half of the season) coach pitch (second half of the season) 2 Throwing technique 3 Catching technique (with and without a glove) 4 Good sportsmanship 5 Basic fielding techniquemdashgrounders and fly balls 6 Base runningmdashwhen to stay when to go 7 Play at first for the first half of the season - Play at correct base for the second half of the season 8 Backup responsibilities 9 SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety

Manual for Managers and Coaches

53 Game Format

531 1 Emphasize fun and sportsmanship

7

2 Game (and practice) times are limited to one hour and a half This should allow time for each team to come up to bat three times in a game Each team will have 15 minutes of practice time on the field before the game begins

3 No score keeping no outs no stealing and no catcher is used 4 Every offensive player has a turn at bat each inning 5 Every defensive player takes a position in the field each inning Positions should approximate regular

baseball fielding positions (no catcher) 6 At Manager discretion players may be rotated into different defensive positions after every 1 or 2 batters

At a minimum players should be rotated into different defensive positions each inning 7 Batters and base runners must wear helmets at all times 8 Runners advance one base 9 Make the play at 1st base after each hit 10 No advancement on over-throws 11 The team at bat should place adults as 1st and 3rd base Coaches to direct the runners 12 The defensive coaches should be on the field coaching the fielders 13 The last batter runs all the bases The defense can only make a play at one base This avoids the ball being

thrown all over the field and potential injuries 14 Coach pitch starts at the half way point of the season However children who do not want to hit from the

coach should be allowed to hit from the Tee if they want Children should also be hitting from the Tee if they do not possess sufficient skill to hit the ball from coach pitch It is recommended that the Tee be used for the first couple of gamespractices to assess the hitting ability of the players on the team

15 After five pitches from the coach the child should be moved to the Tee if they have not had success hitting the ball to keep the game moving

16 During the second half of the season defensive plays to the proper base can be introduced (instead of always at first base) if the team is regularly making plays at first base

6 Minor LeagueAA Division The Minor League AA Division is generally intended for 3rd and 4th year players League Age 7 and 8 years old Its purpose is to introduce each player to baseball build on the previous years experience and introduce defensive tactics The AA Division is based on participation not competition There is a League Director who represents their League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The League Director is responsible for recruiting Managers and Coaches the formation of teams and working with the Scheduler to schedule practices and games There will be two scheduled game(s) andor practice(s) per week A Soft RIF ball is used during all practices and games Coaches are encouraged to interrupt the game to teach proper game plays and rules The League Director with the approval of the League President selects managers for each AA Division team Managers should encourage parent participation and seek assistance from those with coaching andor baseball experience It is the role of the Manager and Coaches to encourage each player to participate The players are very young children and generally need some encouragement Every play made during a game or practice is a great play First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field

61 Team Selection Teams are created by the AA League Director Players who are League age 7 do not participate in the League skill assessment Players who are League age 8 may take part in the AAA League skill assessment organized by the League Player Agent and are possibly drafted by the AAA Division The League Director assigns teams with input from the Managers Each team is totally restocked each year and is composed of up to 9 players depending on registrations Team size of approximately 8-9 is generally good at this level because of the relatively short attention span of these young players The AA League Director will try to ensure that the teams are evenly balanced The eligible children of each AA League Manager are automatically assigned to their parents team

8

62 Skills to Teach

1 The proper hitting technique 2 The proper throwing technique

3 The proper catching technique

4 The proper pitching technique

5 Good sportsmanship and teamwork 6 The proper fielding technique grounders and fly balls 7 Base running when to stay when to go how many bases to advance

8 Play at correct base concept of force out primary and secondary plays

9 Backup responsibilities

10 Throw from outfield using the relay

11 Safety Please review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the ldquoSafety Manual for Managers and

Coaches

12 Hustle and good attitude give your best effort

13 Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

63 Game Format

631 1St Half of the Season

1 Emphasize fun good sportsmanship and teamwork

2 Player Appearance - All players shall have their shirts tucked in and hats on forward

3 Field Setup

a Bases shall be set 50rsquo apart

b The Pitching Machine shall be set 46rsquo from Homeplate (this may need small adjustments throughout the game)

c Pitching Machine Setting i Power Pedal - 2

ii Release Arm - 4 iii Micro Adjustment Arm - 3

d Player pitchers shall pitch from 41rsquo from Homeplate at the pitching rubber

4 Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day Game (and practice) times

are limited to 90 minutes This should allow time for each team to come up to bat three to four times in a game

9

a Games will be played for 90 minutes The goal is to play as many innings as possible within the

90-minute time frame There is a hard stop at the 90-minute mark No score keeping no stealing

b The first pitch of the game will be thrown at the game start time indicated on the schedule Any warm ups shall be conducted prior to game time

5 Each team will dress and play a catcher

6 Each team will have a set batting order every game The order shall not change each inning

7 On defense we will count the number of ldquofieldedrdquo outs Inning will end if the defense successfully records

3 outs (strikeouts donrsquot count) or the offensive teams bats through the entire lineup once

8 Offensive Coach will utilize a pitching machine supplied by the League to throw consistent strikes to the batters If the player does not get a hit after 5 swings the Offensive Coach is REQUIRED to have the hitter use a batting tee to hit the ball No exceptions in terms of surpassing 5 swings or not using the tee The game needs to be kept moving in an efficient manner

9 Every defensive player takes a position in the field each inning Positions should approximate regular

baseball fielding positions Defensive players should rotate positions each inning

10 Batters and base runners MUST wear helmets Protective cups are encouraged but not required However any player who wants to play Catcher is required to wear a protective cup

11 Runners advance one base on infield hits On hits to the outfield runners advance on coachrsquos discretion

but must stop when the ball is returned to the infield

12 Make play at correct base after each hit the runner is retired if he or she is out

13 No advancement on over-throws

14 Get the ball to the playerpitcher after each playmdashCoach gets overthrows

15 The offense should place adults as 1st and 3rd base Coaches to direct the runners

16 The defensive Coaches should be on the field coaching the defense

17 The last batter advances normallymdashone base on infield hit multiple bases if hit to the outfield The last batter does NOT circle the bases (for the sake of doing so) like the T-Ball kids do

18 Throw from outfield using the relay

632 2nd Half of the Season

1 TEES ARE NOT ALLOWED IN THE SECOND HALF OF THE SEASON

2 If both Managers agree prior to a start of a game then a player from each team will pitch each inning

a In the AA Division we want to introduce batters to player pitching but if a AA League Manager does not have players (s)he feels can or should pitch the two opposing Managers can decide before the game that players pitch for only 1 inning or 2 innings and the rest of the game can be pitched via the Pitching Machine The safety of the players is the most important aspect of any game

10

b If a team determines that they do not have a player pitcher then batters get a maximum of 5

swings off of the pitching machine The 3 missing player pitches are eliminated from the at bat

3 The rules for Kid Pitching in AA

a Only kids who can throw reasonably accurately are allowed to pitch and if needed they are allowed to pitch from an area slightly closer to home plate (as long as itrsquos safe for the batter)

b Kid pitchers will throw a MAXIMUM of 3 pitches per hitter If the ball is not put in play the coach steps in to use the Pitching Machine and the batter is given hisher usual 5 swings

c If a batter is unsuccessful after 3 kid pitches and 5 pitching machine pitches then they are declared out by strikeout

d The Pitching Machine should be set up on Pitcherrsquos Mound and ready to go on the field during the 2nd half of the season to insure a speedy transition from ldquokid pitchrdquo to ldquomachine pitchrdquo if no contact is made after the 3 kid pitches

4 A 5th swing foul is not an out The at-bat will continue until the ball is hit in to play or a 5th or subsequent

pitch is missed

7 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division is generally intended for players League Age 9ndash12 years old The AAA Division is more competitive than AA Division but its focus is still on instruction and participation It is intended to teach more refined team play with a greater emphasis on developing individual skills Each team is composed of 11 to 13 players along with one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches Scores are kept Each team plays 10-15 games two to three games a week Games are 6 innings long An official Little League Baseball is used for all practices and games The AAA League Director represents the AAA League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The AAA League Director with the approval of the League President selects Managers for the AAA League Managing in the AAA Division is not easy because of the range of age and talent in the players Players as young as 8 are eligible to play in the AAA Division while players as old as 11 (and if a parent requests as old as 12) may still be playing in the AAA League With such a mix you have the potential of physically bigger players playing against significantly smaller players This is compounded by the fact that some of the 8 and 9 year olds may be considered the most talented players in their age group while some of the older players are likely to have been passed over in the Major League draft one or more times Because of this it is important that the AAA Division Manager be aware of possible bruised egos and hurt feelings on the part of some players andor their parents The AAA Division is a more competitive League than the AA Division and the Manager should not be expected to give preferential treatment to any player but the Manager should be aware that such feelings might exist and therefore should emphasize and recognize positive play and attitude Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

1 Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

2 Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

11

3 BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

4 The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

5 Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules

6 Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

7 Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League Baseball

which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

8 Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

9 Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

10 Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will

inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

11 All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field

until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

Each AAA team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field 71 Team Selection Each AAA Division team is totally restocked each year Players are not carried on the same roster from one year to the next AAA League teams are selected in a player draft and all eligible players are required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the Player Agent It is the responsibility of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent to supervise the AAA League draft in an attempt to distribute the players into evenly balanced teams The draft may be run in accordance with the Method in First Year of OperationmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo In order to fulfill the age and skill requirements the AAA Division must conduct its draft in the following manner

1 Eligible children of the AAA managers are automatically assigned to their parents team This provision is considered the written option required by Little League A manager may request to waive this option in writing before the draft starts The order for each round will be determined by the total score of drafted players through the most recently completed round

2 Each team on the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent should have an equal number of players assigned to their roster who are considered viable pitchers (the Managers child could fulfill part of this requirement) Note that 12 year olds cannot pitch in the AAA Division

12

3 On the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent the 9 10 11 and 12-year-old players who were not previously selected in the Major League draft should be drafted on a round-by-round basis Note all 10ndash12 year old players not selected in the Major League draft and all 9 years old players must be drafted into the AAA League at this time 9 years old players can play down in AA if requested by a parent or at the recommendation of the AAA League Director

4 Finally if any roster spots are still available after the 9ndash12 year old players have been selected on the recommendations of the AAA Division Director and the League Player Agent 8 year old players who are considered skilled enough and who have requested to play at the AAA Division level can be drafted

Note that the Local League requires that if a Major League player misses more than three consecutive games due to illness or injury that players team must fill that roster spot with the highest rated eligible player from the Player Agentrsquos list of eligible players in the AAA Division This generally occurs at least once a year This allows the possibility of an 11 year old who may have been overlooked in the draft to be called up to the Major League during the season See player agent section for more details 72 Skills to Teach In AAA Division the Manager and Coaches teach baseball fundamentals with an emphasis on more refined team play and individual skills

1 Team skills and practices to teach

a How a defensive team functions as a whole The role each defensive player has in basics defensive plays an infield grounder to the right side of the infield to the left side of the infield pop flies to left to center to right etc

b SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual (ASAP Plan) for Managers and Coaches

2 Individual skills and practices to teach

a The batter should not turn their head when facing a pitch

b Proper throwing technique use a crow hop to set the feet throw across the body etc

c How to run the bases make a wide turn on a walk cut the base on an extra base hit stealing a

base

d How to field a grounder use two hands come up in proper throwing position

e How to track and catch a fly ball catch the ball with two hands over the head use crossover steps to run back

f How a catcher should block a bad pitch throwing out base runner on a steal

g Pitching throw strikes not speed

h Good sportsmanship

i Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

j Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day

13

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season

1 Scorebooks are kept by each team but statistics should be kept to a minimum with no posting of individual results All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside the dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to the player attempting to make a play on the ball)

2 9 players take defensive positions in the field for each inning but all players are included in each teams batting order for the entire game

3 Minimum Playing Time rules in AAA

a 12 Player Roster (or fewer) on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

b 13 Player Roster on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) 1 Exception

a Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

b The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

c Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

4 Every player is required to play at least two (2) innings (6 outs) in the infield per game unless a legitimate

safety concern is raised by the player or coach

a Free substitution is allowed except for the pitcher Once a pitcher has been removed from the mound they may not pitch again during that game

5 Players may not play the same defensive position including pitcher and catcher positions for more than 3

innings a game

a If a player plays a position for 1 pitch in an inning it counts as an inning Example A pitcher enters the game in the 4th inning with 2 outs and throws 1 pitch to record the final outhellipthat counts as 1 inning pitched

6 Each team bats until the defensive team gets three outs or 4 runs are scored No more than 4 runs are

scored in an inning Example 3 runs are already in and the bases are loaded The batter hits a home run Only the 4th run is counted The other three runs do not count

7 Batters get 3 strikes or walk on 4 balls

14

8 Bunting is allowed during the entire season

9 No leading is allowed

10 Stealing is allowed

a Stealing of home plate is only allowed with two outs

i If a runner steals home with less than two outs and is tagged out prior to crossing the plate the runner is out

ii If the runner successfully crosses the plate without being tagged they will be sent back to third base with no out recorded

11 Stealing is allowed one base at a time The catcher is encouraged to throw the ball and attempt to throw out

the base runner The runner(s) cannot advance any additional bases on a wild throw by the catcher or an error by the fielder

12 After a walk the batter may not automatically advance to 2nd base (even if ball 4 goes to the backstop) If a walk occurs the batter is only entitled to 1st base

13 The play is complete and all runners must stop when the defense possesses the ball at the base in front of the lead runner

a If the runner is in progress to the base they must decide quickly whether to continue or go back Runners may not taunt or otherwise bait throws Failure of the runners to quickly make a decision andor the appearance of trying to bait a throw will result in the following

i First Occurrence Warning to the Manager and bench of offensive team

ii Subsequent Occurrences The lead runner will be called out and must return to the

bench

b If the ball is at the same base as the lead runner the lead runner must stop

c If the ball is at a base which is behind the lead runner (ie lead runner is at second and the ball is at first) the runner can continue

d If there are two base runners (say 1st and 3rd) and the ball is at the base in front of the lead runner (ie home) the following runner can continue to second base at hisher risk

14 Runners may not advance on overthrows back to the pitcher

15 Runners may advance one base on overthrows that go out of play

16 The manager is allowed to use coaches or players as base coaches

17 A new inning cannot be started after 120 minutes from the start of the game

a The start of a new inning is when the defensive team takes the field

18 Warm-up time between innings should be minimized in order to get games completed within the scheduled

time

a When possible players who are expected to play Catcher the following half inning should get their catcherrsquos gear on and be ready to take the field once their team is retired

15

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

It is the responsibility of the Managers in conjunction with the Concession Stand Managers and the League Director to create a concession stand schedule for each of your home games at the Major League field During Major League games the Home Team Manager is responsible for providing Concession Stand coverage The Visiting Team Manager is responsible for all pre-game field preparation During AAA games both teams should provide coverage

5 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League is generally intended for players League Ages 4 to 6 years old League Age 7 may play Tee-Ball on request of a childrsquos parent(s) Its purpose is to introduce each player to baseball and build on the previous years experience This league introduces the concept 1st half to 2nd half progression This is designed to keep the season interesting for the kids and build on existing skills Tee-Ball is based on participation not competition There is a League Director who represents their League on the Local Leaguersquos Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The League Director is responsible for recruiting managerscoaches and working with the Scheduler to schedule practices and games There will be a maximum of two games andor practices per week and a Soft-Tee ball is used during all practices and games (catching and throwing drills may also involve other soft lightweight balls such as a tennis ball) The League Director with the approval of the League President selects managers for each Tee-Ball team Managers should encourage parent participation and seek assistance from those with coaching andor baseball experience It is the role of the Manager and Coaches to encourage each player to participate The players are very young children and generally need some encouragement Every play made during a game or practice is a great play First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored in the equipment box at the field

51 Team Selection Players who participate in Tee-Ball do not take part in a skill assessment and are not subject to a player draft The League Director assigns teams with input from the Managers Parents of players League Age 6 may request that their children play-up by participating at the next higher League level but must have had a full year of Tee-Ball already This is subject to support from the Manager and League Director approval based on subjective skill assessment by the League Managers Parents of players League Age 7 may request that their children play-down by participating at the Tee-Ball level Each team is totally restocked each year and is composed of up to 7 players depending on registrations Team size of approximately 5-6 is generally good at this level because of the relatively short attention span of these young players Teams should be of consistent size within the League but perceived skill level balancing is not required

52 Skills to Teach

521 Skills to Teach 1 Proper hitting technique with the Tee (first half of the season) coach pitch (second half of the season) 2 Throwing technique 3 Catching technique (with and without a glove) 4 Good sportsmanship 5 Basic fielding techniquemdashgrounders and fly balls 6 Base runningmdashwhen to stay when to go 7 Play at first for the first half of the season - Play at correct base for the second half of the season 8 Backup responsibilities 9 SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety

Manual for Managers and Coaches

53 Game Format

531 1 Emphasize fun and sportsmanship

7

2 Game (and practice) times are limited to one hour and a half This should allow time for each team to come up to bat three times in a game Each team will have 15 minutes of practice time on the field before the game begins

3 No score keeping no outs no stealing and no catcher is used 4 Every offensive player has a turn at bat each inning 5 Every defensive player takes a position in the field each inning Positions should approximate regular

baseball fielding positions (no catcher) 6 At Manager discretion players may be rotated into different defensive positions after every 1 or 2 batters

At a minimum players should be rotated into different defensive positions each inning 7 Batters and base runners must wear helmets at all times 8 Runners advance one base 9 Make the play at 1st base after each hit 10 No advancement on over-throws 11 The team at bat should place adults as 1st and 3rd base Coaches to direct the runners 12 The defensive coaches should be on the field coaching the fielders 13 The last batter runs all the bases The defense can only make a play at one base This avoids the ball being

thrown all over the field and potential injuries 14 Coach pitch starts at the half way point of the season However children who do not want to hit from the

coach should be allowed to hit from the Tee if they want Children should also be hitting from the Tee if they do not possess sufficient skill to hit the ball from coach pitch It is recommended that the Tee be used for the first couple of gamespractices to assess the hitting ability of the players on the team

15 After five pitches from the coach the child should be moved to the Tee if they have not had success hitting the ball to keep the game moving

16 During the second half of the season defensive plays to the proper base can be introduced (instead of always at first base) if the team is regularly making plays at first base

6 Minor LeagueAA Division The Minor League AA Division is generally intended for 3rd and 4th year players League Age 7 and 8 years old Its purpose is to introduce each player to baseball build on the previous years experience and introduce defensive tactics The AA Division is based on participation not competition There is a League Director who represents their League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The League Director is responsible for recruiting Managers and Coaches the formation of teams and working with the Scheduler to schedule practices and games There will be two scheduled game(s) andor practice(s) per week A Soft RIF ball is used during all practices and games Coaches are encouraged to interrupt the game to teach proper game plays and rules The League Director with the approval of the League President selects managers for each AA Division team Managers should encourage parent participation and seek assistance from those with coaching andor baseball experience It is the role of the Manager and Coaches to encourage each player to participate The players are very young children and generally need some encouragement Every play made during a game or practice is a great play First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field

61 Team Selection Teams are created by the AA League Director Players who are League age 7 do not participate in the League skill assessment Players who are League age 8 may take part in the AAA League skill assessment organized by the League Player Agent and are possibly drafted by the AAA Division The League Director assigns teams with input from the Managers Each team is totally restocked each year and is composed of up to 9 players depending on registrations Team size of approximately 8-9 is generally good at this level because of the relatively short attention span of these young players The AA League Director will try to ensure that the teams are evenly balanced The eligible children of each AA League Manager are automatically assigned to their parents team

8

62 Skills to Teach

1 The proper hitting technique 2 The proper throwing technique

3 The proper catching technique

4 The proper pitching technique

5 Good sportsmanship and teamwork 6 The proper fielding technique grounders and fly balls 7 Base running when to stay when to go how many bases to advance

8 Play at correct base concept of force out primary and secondary plays

9 Backup responsibilities

10 Throw from outfield using the relay

11 Safety Please review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the ldquoSafety Manual for Managers and

Coaches

12 Hustle and good attitude give your best effort

13 Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

63 Game Format

631 1St Half of the Season

1 Emphasize fun good sportsmanship and teamwork

2 Player Appearance - All players shall have their shirts tucked in and hats on forward

3 Field Setup

a Bases shall be set 50rsquo apart

b The Pitching Machine shall be set 46rsquo from Homeplate (this may need small adjustments throughout the game)

c Pitching Machine Setting i Power Pedal - 2

ii Release Arm - 4 iii Micro Adjustment Arm - 3

d Player pitchers shall pitch from 41rsquo from Homeplate at the pitching rubber

4 Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day Game (and practice) times

are limited to 90 minutes This should allow time for each team to come up to bat three to four times in a game

9

a Games will be played for 90 minutes The goal is to play as many innings as possible within the

90-minute time frame There is a hard stop at the 90-minute mark No score keeping no stealing

b The first pitch of the game will be thrown at the game start time indicated on the schedule Any warm ups shall be conducted prior to game time

5 Each team will dress and play a catcher

6 Each team will have a set batting order every game The order shall not change each inning

7 On defense we will count the number of ldquofieldedrdquo outs Inning will end if the defense successfully records

3 outs (strikeouts donrsquot count) or the offensive teams bats through the entire lineup once

8 Offensive Coach will utilize a pitching machine supplied by the League to throw consistent strikes to the batters If the player does not get a hit after 5 swings the Offensive Coach is REQUIRED to have the hitter use a batting tee to hit the ball No exceptions in terms of surpassing 5 swings or not using the tee The game needs to be kept moving in an efficient manner

9 Every defensive player takes a position in the field each inning Positions should approximate regular

baseball fielding positions Defensive players should rotate positions each inning

10 Batters and base runners MUST wear helmets Protective cups are encouraged but not required However any player who wants to play Catcher is required to wear a protective cup

11 Runners advance one base on infield hits On hits to the outfield runners advance on coachrsquos discretion

but must stop when the ball is returned to the infield

12 Make play at correct base after each hit the runner is retired if he or she is out

13 No advancement on over-throws

14 Get the ball to the playerpitcher after each playmdashCoach gets overthrows

15 The offense should place adults as 1st and 3rd base Coaches to direct the runners

16 The defensive Coaches should be on the field coaching the defense

17 The last batter advances normallymdashone base on infield hit multiple bases if hit to the outfield The last batter does NOT circle the bases (for the sake of doing so) like the T-Ball kids do

18 Throw from outfield using the relay

632 2nd Half of the Season

1 TEES ARE NOT ALLOWED IN THE SECOND HALF OF THE SEASON

2 If both Managers agree prior to a start of a game then a player from each team will pitch each inning

a In the AA Division we want to introduce batters to player pitching but if a AA League Manager does not have players (s)he feels can or should pitch the two opposing Managers can decide before the game that players pitch for only 1 inning or 2 innings and the rest of the game can be pitched via the Pitching Machine The safety of the players is the most important aspect of any game

10

b If a team determines that they do not have a player pitcher then batters get a maximum of 5

swings off of the pitching machine The 3 missing player pitches are eliminated from the at bat

3 The rules for Kid Pitching in AA

a Only kids who can throw reasonably accurately are allowed to pitch and if needed they are allowed to pitch from an area slightly closer to home plate (as long as itrsquos safe for the batter)

b Kid pitchers will throw a MAXIMUM of 3 pitches per hitter If the ball is not put in play the coach steps in to use the Pitching Machine and the batter is given hisher usual 5 swings

c If a batter is unsuccessful after 3 kid pitches and 5 pitching machine pitches then they are declared out by strikeout

d The Pitching Machine should be set up on Pitcherrsquos Mound and ready to go on the field during the 2nd half of the season to insure a speedy transition from ldquokid pitchrdquo to ldquomachine pitchrdquo if no contact is made after the 3 kid pitches

4 A 5th swing foul is not an out The at-bat will continue until the ball is hit in to play or a 5th or subsequent

pitch is missed

7 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division is generally intended for players League Age 9ndash12 years old The AAA Division is more competitive than AA Division but its focus is still on instruction and participation It is intended to teach more refined team play with a greater emphasis on developing individual skills Each team is composed of 11 to 13 players along with one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches Scores are kept Each team plays 10-15 games two to three games a week Games are 6 innings long An official Little League Baseball is used for all practices and games The AAA League Director represents the AAA League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The AAA League Director with the approval of the League President selects Managers for the AAA League Managing in the AAA Division is not easy because of the range of age and talent in the players Players as young as 8 are eligible to play in the AAA Division while players as old as 11 (and if a parent requests as old as 12) may still be playing in the AAA League With such a mix you have the potential of physically bigger players playing against significantly smaller players This is compounded by the fact that some of the 8 and 9 year olds may be considered the most talented players in their age group while some of the older players are likely to have been passed over in the Major League draft one or more times Because of this it is important that the AAA Division Manager be aware of possible bruised egos and hurt feelings on the part of some players andor their parents The AAA Division is a more competitive League than the AA Division and the Manager should not be expected to give preferential treatment to any player but the Manager should be aware that such feelings might exist and therefore should emphasize and recognize positive play and attitude Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

1 Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

2 Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

11

3 BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

4 The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

5 Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules

6 Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

7 Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League Baseball

which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

8 Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

9 Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

10 Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will

inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

11 All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field

until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

Each AAA team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field 71 Team Selection Each AAA Division team is totally restocked each year Players are not carried on the same roster from one year to the next AAA League teams are selected in a player draft and all eligible players are required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the Player Agent It is the responsibility of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent to supervise the AAA League draft in an attempt to distribute the players into evenly balanced teams The draft may be run in accordance with the Method in First Year of OperationmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo In order to fulfill the age and skill requirements the AAA Division must conduct its draft in the following manner

1 Eligible children of the AAA managers are automatically assigned to their parents team This provision is considered the written option required by Little League A manager may request to waive this option in writing before the draft starts The order for each round will be determined by the total score of drafted players through the most recently completed round

2 Each team on the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent should have an equal number of players assigned to their roster who are considered viable pitchers (the Managers child could fulfill part of this requirement) Note that 12 year olds cannot pitch in the AAA Division

12

3 On the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent the 9 10 11 and 12-year-old players who were not previously selected in the Major League draft should be drafted on a round-by-round basis Note all 10ndash12 year old players not selected in the Major League draft and all 9 years old players must be drafted into the AAA League at this time 9 years old players can play down in AA if requested by a parent or at the recommendation of the AAA League Director

4 Finally if any roster spots are still available after the 9ndash12 year old players have been selected on the recommendations of the AAA Division Director and the League Player Agent 8 year old players who are considered skilled enough and who have requested to play at the AAA Division level can be drafted

Note that the Local League requires that if a Major League player misses more than three consecutive games due to illness or injury that players team must fill that roster spot with the highest rated eligible player from the Player Agentrsquos list of eligible players in the AAA Division This generally occurs at least once a year This allows the possibility of an 11 year old who may have been overlooked in the draft to be called up to the Major League during the season See player agent section for more details 72 Skills to Teach In AAA Division the Manager and Coaches teach baseball fundamentals with an emphasis on more refined team play and individual skills

1 Team skills and practices to teach

a How a defensive team functions as a whole The role each defensive player has in basics defensive plays an infield grounder to the right side of the infield to the left side of the infield pop flies to left to center to right etc

b SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual (ASAP Plan) for Managers and Coaches

2 Individual skills and practices to teach

a The batter should not turn their head when facing a pitch

b Proper throwing technique use a crow hop to set the feet throw across the body etc

c How to run the bases make a wide turn on a walk cut the base on an extra base hit stealing a

base

d How to field a grounder use two hands come up in proper throwing position

e How to track and catch a fly ball catch the ball with two hands over the head use crossover steps to run back

f How a catcher should block a bad pitch throwing out base runner on a steal

g Pitching throw strikes not speed

h Good sportsmanship

i Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

j Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day

13

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season

1 Scorebooks are kept by each team but statistics should be kept to a minimum with no posting of individual results All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside the dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to the player attempting to make a play on the ball)

2 9 players take defensive positions in the field for each inning but all players are included in each teams batting order for the entire game

3 Minimum Playing Time rules in AAA

a 12 Player Roster (or fewer) on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

b 13 Player Roster on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) 1 Exception

a Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

b The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

c Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

4 Every player is required to play at least two (2) innings (6 outs) in the infield per game unless a legitimate

safety concern is raised by the player or coach

a Free substitution is allowed except for the pitcher Once a pitcher has been removed from the mound they may not pitch again during that game

5 Players may not play the same defensive position including pitcher and catcher positions for more than 3

innings a game

a If a player plays a position for 1 pitch in an inning it counts as an inning Example A pitcher enters the game in the 4th inning with 2 outs and throws 1 pitch to record the final outhellipthat counts as 1 inning pitched

6 Each team bats until the defensive team gets three outs or 4 runs are scored No more than 4 runs are

scored in an inning Example 3 runs are already in and the bases are loaded The batter hits a home run Only the 4th run is counted The other three runs do not count

7 Batters get 3 strikes or walk on 4 balls

14

8 Bunting is allowed during the entire season

9 No leading is allowed

10 Stealing is allowed

a Stealing of home plate is only allowed with two outs

i If a runner steals home with less than two outs and is tagged out prior to crossing the plate the runner is out

ii If the runner successfully crosses the plate without being tagged they will be sent back to third base with no out recorded

11 Stealing is allowed one base at a time The catcher is encouraged to throw the ball and attempt to throw out

the base runner The runner(s) cannot advance any additional bases on a wild throw by the catcher or an error by the fielder

12 After a walk the batter may not automatically advance to 2nd base (even if ball 4 goes to the backstop) If a walk occurs the batter is only entitled to 1st base

13 The play is complete and all runners must stop when the defense possesses the ball at the base in front of the lead runner

a If the runner is in progress to the base they must decide quickly whether to continue or go back Runners may not taunt or otherwise bait throws Failure of the runners to quickly make a decision andor the appearance of trying to bait a throw will result in the following

i First Occurrence Warning to the Manager and bench of offensive team

ii Subsequent Occurrences The lead runner will be called out and must return to the

bench

b If the ball is at the same base as the lead runner the lead runner must stop

c If the ball is at a base which is behind the lead runner (ie lead runner is at second and the ball is at first) the runner can continue

d If there are two base runners (say 1st and 3rd) and the ball is at the base in front of the lead runner (ie home) the following runner can continue to second base at hisher risk

14 Runners may not advance on overthrows back to the pitcher

15 Runners may advance one base on overthrows that go out of play

16 The manager is allowed to use coaches or players as base coaches

17 A new inning cannot be started after 120 minutes from the start of the game

a The start of a new inning is when the defensive team takes the field

18 Warm-up time between innings should be minimized in order to get games completed within the scheduled

time

a When possible players who are expected to play Catcher the following half inning should get their catcherrsquos gear on and be ready to take the field once their team is retired

15

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

2 Game (and practice) times are limited to one hour and a half This should allow time for each team to come up to bat three times in a game Each team will have 15 minutes of practice time on the field before the game begins

3 No score keeping no outs no stealing and no catcher is used 4 Every offensive player has a turn at bat each inning 5 Every defensive player takes a position in the field each inning Positions should approximate regular

baseball fielding positions (no catcher) 6 At Manager discretion players may be rotated into different defensive positions after every 1 or 2 batters

At a minimum players should be rotated into different defensive positions each inning 7 Batters and base runners must wear helmets at all times 8 Runners advance one base 9 Make the play at 1st base after each hit 10 No advancement on over-throws 11 The team at bat should place adults as 1st and 3rd base Coaches to direct the runners 12 The defensive coaches should be on the field coaching the fielders 13 The last batter runs all the bases The defense can only make a play at one base This avoids the ball being

thrown all over the field and potential injuries 14 Coach pitch starts at the half way point of the season However children who do not want to hit from the

coach should be allowed to hit from the Tee if they want Children should also be hitting from the Tee if they do not possess sufficient skill to hit the ball from coach pitch It is recommended that the Tee be used for the first couple of gamespractices to assess the hitting ability of the players on the team

15 After five pitches from the coach the child should be moved to the Tee if they have not had success hitting the ball to keep the game moving

16 During the second half of the season defensive plays to the proper base can be introduced (instead of always at first base) if the team is regularly making plays at first base

6 Minor LeagueAA Division The Minor League AA Division is generally intended for 3rd and 4th year players League Age 7 and 8 years old Its purpose is to introduce each player to baseball build on the previous years experience and introduce defensive tactics The AA Division is based on participation not competition There is a League Director who represents their League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The League Director is responsible for recruiting Managers and Coaches the formation of teams and working with the Scheduler to schedule practices and games There will be two scheduled game(s) andor practice(s) per week A Soft RIF ball is used during all practices and games Coaches are encouraged to interrupt the game to teach proper game plays and rules The League Director with the approval of the League President selects managers for each AA Division team Managers should encourage parent participation and seek assistance from those with coaching andor baseball experience It is the role of the Manager and Coaches to encourage each player to participate The players are very young children and generally need some encouragement Every play made during a game or practice is a great play First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field

61 Team Selection Teams are created by the AA League Director Players who are League age 7 do not participate in the League skill assessment Players who are League age 8 may take part in the AAA League skill assessment organized by the League Player Agent and are possibly drafted by the AAA Division The League Director assigns teams with input from the Managers Each team is totally restocked each year and is composed of up to 9 players depending on registrations Team size of approximately 8-9 is generally good at this level because of the relatively short attention span of these young players The AA League Director will try to ensure that the teams are evenly balanced The eligible children of each AA League Manager are automatically assigned to their parents team

8

62 Skills to Teach

1 The proper hitting technique 2 The proper throwing technique

3 The proper catching technique

4 The proper pitching technique

5 Good sportsmanship and teamwork 6 The proper fielding technique grounders and fly balls 7 Base running when to stay when to go how many bases to advance

8 Play at correct base concept of force out primary and secondary plays

9 Backup responsibilities

10 Throw from outfield using the relay

11 Safety Please review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the ldquoSafety Manual for Managers and

Coaches

12 Hustle and good attitude give your best effort

13 Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

63 Game Format

631 1St Half of the Season

1 Emphasize fun good sportsmanship and teamwork

2 Player Appearance - All players shall have their shirts tucked in and hats on forward

3 Field Setup

a Bases shall be set 50rsquo apart

b The Pitching Machine shall be set 46rsquo from Homeplate (this may need small adjustments throughout the game)

c Pitching Machine Setting i Power Pedal - 2

ii Release Arm - 4 iii Micro Adjustment Arm - 3

d Player pitchers shall pitch from 41rsquo from Homeplate at the pitching rubber

4 Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day Game (and practice) times

are limited to 90 minutes This should allow time for each team to come up to bat three to four times in a game

9

a Games will be played for 90 minutes The goal is to play as many innings as possible within the

90-minute time frame There is a hard stop at the 90-minute mark No score keeping no stealing

b The first pitch of the game will be thrown at the game start time indicated on the schedule Any warm ups shall be conducted prior to game time

5 Each team will dress and play a catcher

6 Each team will have a set batting order every game The order shall not change each inning

7 On defense we will count the number of ldquofieldedrdquo outs Inning will end if the defense successfully records

3 outs (strikeouts donrsquot count) or the offensive teams bats through the entire lineup once

8 Offensive Coach will utilize a pitching machine supplied by the League to throw consistent strikes to the batters If the player does not get a hit after 5 swings the Offensive Coach is REQUIRED to have the hitter use a batting tee to hit the ball No exceptions in terms of surpassing 5 swings or not using the tee The game needs to be kept moving in an efficient manner

9 Every defensive player takes a position in the field each inning Positions should approximate regular

baseball fielding positions Defensive players should rotate positions each inning

10 Batters and base runners MUST wear helmets Protective cups are encouraged but not required However any player who wants to play Catcher is required to wear a protective cup

11 Runners advance one base on infield hits On hits to the outfield runners advance on coachrsquos discretion

but must stop when the ball is returned to the infield

12 Make play at correct base after each hit the runner is retired if he or she is out

13 No advancement on over-throws

14 Get the ball to the playerpitcher after each playmdashCoach gets overthrows

15 The offense should place adults as 1st and 3rd base Coaches to direct the runners

16 The defensive Coaches should be on the field coaching the defense

17 The last batter advances normallymdashone base on infield hit multiple bases if hit to the outfield The last batter does NOT circle the bases (for the sake of doing so) like the T-Ball kids do

18 Throw from outfield using the relay

632 2nd Half of the Season

1 TEES ARE NOT ALLOWED IN THE SECOND HALF OF THE SEASON

2 If both Managers agree prior to a start of a game then a player from each team will pitch each inning

a In the AA Division we want to introduce batters to player pitching but if a AA League Manager does not have players (s)he feels can or should pitch the two opposing Managers can decide before the game that players pitch for only 1 inning or 2 innings and the rest of the game can be pitched via the Pitching Machine The safety of the players is the most important aspect of any game

10

b If a team determines that they do not have a player pitcher then batters get a maximum of 5

swings off of the pitching machine The 3 missing player pitches are eliminated from the at bat

3 The rules for Kid Pitching in AA

a Only kids who can throw reasonably accurately are allowed to pitch and if needed they are allowed to pitch from an area slightly closer to home plate (as long as itrsquos safe for the batter)

b Kid pitchers will throw a MAXIMUM of 3 pitches per hitter If the ball is not put in play the coach steps in to use the Pitching Machine and the batter is given hisher usual 5 swings

c If a batter is unsuccessful after 3 kid pitches and 5 pitching machine pitches then they are declared out by strikeout

d The Pitching Machine should be set up on Pitcherrsquos Mound and ready to go on the field during the 2nd half of the season to insure a speedy transition from ldquokid pitchrdquo to ldquomachine pitchrdquo if no contact is made after the 3 kid pitches

4 A 5th swing foul is not an out The at-bat will continue until the ball is hit in to play or a 5th or subsequent

pitch is missed

7 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division is generally intended for players League Age 9ndash12 years old The AAA Division is more competitive than AA Division but its focus is still on instruction and participation It is intended to teach more refined team play with a greater emphasis on developing individual skills Each team is composed of 11 to 13 players along with one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches Scores are kept Each team plays 10-15 games two to three games a week Games are 6 innings long An official Little League Baseball is used for all practices and games The AAA League Director represents the AAA League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The AAA League Director with the approval of the League President selects Managers for the AAA League Managing in the AAA Division is not easy because of the range of age and talent in the players Players as young as 8 are eligible to play in the AAA Division while players as old as 11 (and if a parent requests as old as 12) may still be playing in the AAA League With such a mix you have the potential of physically bigger players playing against significantly smaller players This is compounded by the fact that some of the 8 and 9 year olds may be considered the most talented players in their age group while some of the older players are likely to have been passed over in the Major League draft one or more times Because of this it is important that the AAA Division Manager be aware of possible bruised egos and hurt feelings on the part of some players andor their parents The AAA Division is a more competitive League than the AA Division and the Manager should not be expected to give preferential treatment to any player but the Manager should be aware that such feelings might exist and therefore should emphasize and recognize positive play and attitude Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

1 Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

2 Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

11

3 BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

4 The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

5 Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules

6 Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

7 Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League Baseball

which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

8 Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

9 Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

10 Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will

inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

11 All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field

until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

Each AAA team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field 71 Team Selection Each AAA Division team is totally restocked each year Players are not carried on the same roster from one year to the next AAA League teams are selected in a player draft and all eligible players are required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the Player Agent It is the responsibility of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent to supervise the AAA League draft in an attempt to distribute the players into evenly balanced teams The draft may be run in accordance with the Method in First Year of OperationmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo In order to fulfill the age and skill requirements the AAA Division must conduct its draft in the following manner

1 Eligible children of the AAA managers are automatically assigned to their parents team This provision is considered the written option required by Little League A manager may request to waive this option in writing before the draft starts The order for each round will be determined by the total score of drafted players through the most recently completed round

2 Each team on the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent should have an equal number of players assigned to their roster who are considered viable pitchers (the Managers child could fulfill part of this requirement) Note that 12 year olds cannot pitch in the AAA Division

12

3 On the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent the 9 10 11 and 12-year-old players who were not previously selected in the Major League draft should be drafted on a round-by-round basis Note all 10ndash12 year old players not selected in the Major League draft and all 9 years old players must be drafted into the AAA League at this time 9 years old players can play down in AA if requested by a parent or at the recommendation of the AAA League Director

4 Finally if any roster spots are still available after the 9ndash12 year old players have been selected on the recommendations of the AAA Division Director and the League Player Agent 8 year old players who are considered skilled enough and who have requested to play at the AAA Division level can be drafted

Note that the Local League requires that if a Major League player misses more than three consecutive games due to illness or injury that players team must fill that roster spot with the highest rated eligible player from the Player Agentrsquos list of eligible players in the AAA Division This generally occurs at least once a year This allows the possibility of an 11 year old who may have been overlooked in the draft to be called up to the Major League during the season See player agent section for more details 72 Skills to Teach In AAA Division the Manager and Coaches teach baseball fundamentals with an emphasis on more refined team play and individual skills

1 Team skills and practices to teach

a How a defensive team functions as a whole The role each defensive player has in basics defensive plays an infield grounder to the right side of the infield to the left side of the infield pop flies to left to center to right etc

b SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual (ASAP Plan) for Managers and Coaches

2 Individual skills and practices to teach

a The batter should not turn their head when facing a pitch

b Proper throwing technique use a crow hop to set the feet throw across the body etc

c How to run the bases make a wide turn on a walk cut the base on an extra base hit stealing a

base

d How to field a grounder use two hands come up in proper throwing position

e How to track and catch a fly ball catch the ball with two hands over the head use crossover steps to run back

f How a catcher should block a bad pitch throwing out base runner on a steal

g Pitching throw strikes not speed

h Good sportsmanship

i Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

j Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day

13

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season

1 Scorebooks are kept by each team but statistics should be kept to a minimum with no posting of individual results All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside the dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to the player attempting to make a play on the ball)

2 9 players take defensive positions in the field for each inning but all players are included in each teams batting order for the entire game

3 Minimum Playing Time rules in AAA

a 12 Player Roster (or fewer) on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

b 13 Player Roster on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) 1 Exception

a Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

b The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

c Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

4 Every player is required to play at least two (2) innings (6 outs) in the infield per game unless a legitimate

safety concern is raised by the player or coach

a Free substitution is allowed except for the pitcher Once a pitcher has been removed from the mound they may not pitch again during that game

5 Players may not play the same defensive position including pitcher and catcher positions for more than 3

innings a game

a If a player plays a position for 1 pitch in an inning it counts as an inning Example A pitcher enters the game in the 4th inning with 2 outs and throws 1 pitch to record the final outhellipthat counts as 1 inning pitched

6 Each team bats until the defensive team gets three outs or 4 runs are scored No more than 4 runs are

scored in an inning Example 3 runs are already in and the bases are loaded The batter hits a home run Only the 4th run is counted The other three runs do not count

7 Batters get 3 strikes or walk on 4 balls

14

8 Bunting is allowed during the entire season

9 No leading is allowed

10 Stealing is allowed

a Stealing of home plate is only allowed with two outs

i If a runner steals home with less than two outs and is tagged out prior to crossing the plate the runner is out

ii If the runner successfully crosses the plate without being tagged they will be sent back to third base with no out recorded

11 Stealing is allowed one base at a time The catcher is encouraged to throw the ball and attempt to throw out

the base runner The runner(s) cannot advance any additional bases on a wild throw by the catcher or an error by the fielder

12 After a walk the batter may not automatically advance to 2nd base (even if ball 4 goes to the backstop) If a walk occurs the batter is only entitled to 1st base

13 The play is complete and all runners must stop when the defense possesses the ball at the base in front of the lead runner

a If the runner is in progress to the base they must decide quickly whether to continue or go back Runners may not taunt or otherwise bait throws Failure of the runners to quickly make a decision andor the appearance of trying to bait a throw will result in the following

i First Occurrence Warning to the Manager and bench of offensive team

ii Subsequent Occurrences The lead runner will be called out and must return to the

bench

b If the ball is at the same base as the lead runner the lead runner must stop

c If the ball is at a base which is behind the lead runner (ie lead runner is at second and the ball is at first) the runner can continue

d If there are two base runners (say 1st and 3rd) and the ball is at the base in front of the lead runner (ie home) the following runner can continue to second base at hisher risk

14 Runners may not advance on overthrows back to the pitcher

15 Runners may advance one base on overthrows that go out of play

16 The manager is allowed to use coaches or players as base coaches

17 A new inning cannot be started after 120 minutes from the start of the game

a The start of a new inning is when the defensive team takes the field

18 Warm-up time between innings should be minimized in order to get games completed within the scheduled

time

a When possible players who are expected to play Catcher the following half inning should get their catcherrsquos gear on and be ready to take the field once their team is retired

15

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

62 Skills to Teach

1 The proper hitting technique 2 The proper throwing technique

3 The proper catching technique

4 The proper pitching technique

5 Good sportsmanship and teamwork 6 The proper fielding technique grounders and fly balls 7 Base running when to stay when to go how many bases to advance

8 Play at correct base concept of force out primary and secondary plays

9 Backup responsibilities

10 Throw from outfield using the relay

11 Safety Please review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the ldquoSafety Manual for Managers and

Coaches

12 Hustle and good attitude give your best effort

13 Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

63 Game Format

631 1St Half of the Season

1 Emphasize fun good sportsmanship and teamwork

2 Player Appearance - All players shall have their shirts tucked in and hats on forward

3 Field Setup

a Bases shall be set 50rsquo apart

b The Pitching Machine shall be set 46rsquo from Homeplate (this may need small adjustments throughout the game)

c Pitching Machine Setting i Power Pedal - 2

ii Release Arm - 4 iii Micro Adjustment Arm - 3

d Player pitchers shall pitch from 41rsquo from Homeplate at the pitching rubber

4 Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day Game (and practice) times

are limited to 90 minutes This should allow time for each team to come up to bat three to four times in a game

9

a Games will be played for 90 minutes The goal is to play as many innings as possible within the

90-minute time frame There is a hard stop at the 90-minute mark No score keeping no stealing

b The first pitch of the game will be thrown at the game start time indicated on the schedule Any warm ups shall be conducted prior to game time

5 Each team will dress and play a catcher

6 Each team will have a set batting order every game The order shall not change each inning

7 On defense we will count the number of ldquofieldedrdquo outs Inning will end if the defense successfully records

3 outs (strikeouts donrsquot count) or the offensive teams bats through the entire lineup once

8 Offensive Coach will utilize a pitching machine supplied by the League to throw consistent strikes to the batters If the player does not get a hit after 5 swings the Offensive Coach is REQUIRED to have the hitter use a batting tee to hit the ball No exceptions in terms of surpassing 5 swings or not using the tee The game needs to be kept moving in an efficient manner

9 Every defensive player takes a position in the field each inning Positions should approximate regular

baseball fielding positions Defensive players should rotate positions each inning

10 Batters and base runners MUST wear helmets Protective cups are encouraged but not required However any player who wants to play Catcher is required to wear a protective cup

11 Runners advance one base on infield hits On hits to the outfield runners advance on coachrsquos discretion

but must stop when the ball is returned to the infield

12 Make play at correct base after each hit the runner is retired if he or she is out

13 No advancement on over-throws

14 Get the ball to the playerpitcher after each playmdashCoach gets overthrows

15 The offense should place adults as 1st and 3rd base Coaches to direct the runners

16 The defensive Coaches should be on the field coaching the defense

17 The last batter advances normallymdashone base on infield hit multiple bases if hit to the outfield The last batter does NOT circle the bases (for the sake of doing so) like the T-Ball kids do

18 Throw from outfield using the relay

632 2nd Half of the Season

1 TEES ARE NOT ALLOWED IN THE SECOND HALF OF THE SEASON

2 If both Managers agree prior to a start of a game then a player from each team will pitch each inning

a In the AA Division we want to introduce batters to player pitching but if a AA League Manager does not have players (s)he feels can or should pitch the two opposing Managers can decide before the game that players pitch for only 1 inning or 2 innings and the rest of the game can be pitched via the Pitching Machine The safety of the players is the most important aspect of any game

10

b If a team determines that they do not have a player pitcher then batters get a maximum of 5

swings off of the pitching machine The 3 missing player pitches are eliminated from the at bat

3 The rules for Kid Pitching in AA

a Only kids who can throw reasonably accurately are allowed to pitch and if needed they are allowed to pitch from an area slightly closer to home plate (as long as itrsquos safe for the batter)

b Kid pitchers will throw a MAXIMUM of 3 pitches per hitter If the ball is not put in play the coach steps in to use the Pitching Machine and the batter is given hisher usual 5 swings

c If a batter is unsuccessful after 3 kid pitches and 5 pitching machine pitches then they are declared out by strikeout

d The Pitching Machine should be set up on Pitcherrsquos Mound and ready to go on the field during the 2nd half of the season to insure a speedy transition from ldquokid pitchrdquo to ldquomachine pitchrdquo if no contact is made after the 3 kid pitches

4 A 5th swing foul is not an out The at-bat will continue until the ball is hit in to play or a 5th or subsequent

pitch is missed

7 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division is generally intended for players League Age 9ndash12 years old The AAA Division is more competitive than AA Division but its focus is still on instruction and participation It is intended to teach more refined team play with a greater emphasis on developing individual skills Each team is composed of 11 to 13 players along with one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches Scores are kept Each team plays 10-15 games two to three games a week Games are 6 innings long An official Little League Baseball is used for all practices and games The AAA League Director represents the AAA League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The AAA League Director with the approval of the League President selects Managers for the AAA League Managing in the AAA Division is not easy because of the range of age and talent in the players Players as young as 8 are eligible to play in the AAA Division while players as old as 11 (and if a parent requests as old as 12) may still be playing in the AAA League With such a mix you have the potential of physically bigger players playing against significantly smaller players This is compounded by the fact that some of the 8 and 9 year olds may be considered the most talented players in their age group while some of the older players are likely to have been passed over in the Major League draft one or more times Because of this it is important that the AAA Division Manager be aware of possible bruised egos and hurt feelings on the part of some players andor their parents The AAA Division is a more competitive League than the AA Division and the Manager should not be expected to give preferential treatment to any player but the Manager should be aware that such feelings might exist and therefore should emphasize and recognize positive play and attitude Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

1 Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

2 Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

11

3 BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

4 The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

5 Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules

6 Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

7 Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League Baseball

which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

8 Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

9 Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

10 Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will

inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

11 All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field

until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

Each AAA team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field 71 Team Selection Each AAA Division team is totally restocked each year Players are not carried on the same roster from one year to the next AAA League teams are selected in a player draft and all eligible players are required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the Player Agent It is the responsibility of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent to supervise the AAA League draft in an attempt to distribute the players into evenly balanced teams The draft may be run in accordance with the Method in First Year of OperationmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo In order to fulfill the age and skill requirements the AAA Division must conduct its draft in the following manner

1 Eligible children of the AAA managers are automatically assigned to their parents team This provision is considered the written option required by Little League A manager may request to waive this option in writing before the draft starts The order for each round will be determined by the total score of drafted players through the most recently completed round

2 Each team on the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent should have an equal number of players assigned to their roster who are considered viable pitchers (the Managers child could fulfill part of this requirement) Note that 12 year olds cannot pitch in the AAA Division

12

3 On the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent the 9 10 11 and 12-year-old players who were not previously selected in the Major League draft should be drafted on a round-by-round basis Note all 10ndash12 year old players not selected in the Major League draft and all 9 years old players must be drafted into the AAA League at this time 9 years old players can play down in AA if requested by a parent or at the recommendation of the AAA League Director

4 Finally if any roster spots are still available after the 9ndash12 year old players have been selected on the recommendations of the AAA Division Director and the League Player Agent 8 year old players who are considered skilled enough and who have requested to play at the AAA Division level can be drafted

Note that the Local League requires that if a Major League player misses more than three consecutive games due to illness or injury that players team must fill that roster spot with the highest rated eligible player from the Player Agentrsquos list of eligible players in the AAA Division This generally occurs at least once a year This allows the possibility of an 11 year old who may have been overlooked in the draft to be called up to the Major League during the season See player agent section for more details 72 Skills to Teach In AAA Division the Manager and Coaches teach baseball fundamentals with an emphasis on more refined team play and individual skills

1 Team skills and practices to teach

a How a defensive team functions as a whole The role each defensive player has in basics defensive plays an infield grounder to the right side of the infield to the left side of the infield pop flies to left to center to right etc

b SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual (ASAP Plan) for Managers and Coaches

2 Individual skills and practices to teach

a The batter should not turn their head when facing a pitch

b Proper throwing technique use a crow hop to set the feet throw across the body etc

c How to run the bases make a wide turn on a walk cut the base on an extra base hit stealing a

base

d How to field a grounder use two hands come up in proper throwing position

e How to track and catch a fly ball catch the ball with two hands over the head use crossover steps to run back

f How a catcher should block a bad pitch throwing out base runner on a steal

g Pitching throw strikes not speed

h Good sportsmanship

i Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

j Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day

13

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season

1 Scorebooks are kept by each team but statistics should be kept to a minimum with no posting of individual results All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside the dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to the player attempting to make a play on the ball)

2 9 players take defensive positions in the field for each inning but all players are included in each teams batting order for the entire game

3 Minimum Playing Time rules in AAA

a 12 Player Roster (or fewer) on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

b 13 Player Roster on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) 1 Exception

a Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

b The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

c Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

4 Every player is required to play at least two (2) innings (6 outs) in the infield per game unless a legitimate

safety concern is raised by the player or coach

a Free substitution is allowed except for the pitcher Once a pitcher has been removed from the mound they may not pitch again during that game

5 Players may not play the same defensive position including pitcher and catcher positions for more than 3

innings a game

a If a player plays a position for 1 pitch in an inning it counts as an inning Example A pitcher enters the game in the 4th inning with 2 outs and throws 1 pitch to record the final outhellipthat counts as 1 inning pitched

6 Each team bats until the defensive team gets three outs or 4 runs are scored No more than 4 runs are

scored in an inning Example 3 runs are already in and the bases are loaded The batter hits a home run Only the 4th run is counted The other three runs do not count

7 Batters get 3 strikes or walk on 4 balls

14

8 Bunting is allowed during the entire season

9 No leading is allowed

10 Stealing is allowed

a Stealing of home plate is only allowed with two outs

i If a runner steals home with less than two outs and is tagged out prior to crossing the plate the runner is out

ii If the runner successfully crosses the plate without being tagged they will be sent back to third base with no out recorded

11 Stealing is allowed one base at a time The catcher is encouraged to throw the ball and attempt to throw out

the base runner The runner(s) cannot advance any additional bases on a wild throw by the catcher or an error by the fielder

12 After a walk the batter may not automatically advance to 2nd base (even if ball 4 goes to the backstop) If a walk occurs the batter is only entitled to 1st base

13 The play is complete and all runners must stop when the defense possesses the ball at the base in front of the lead runner

a If the runner is in progress to the base they must decide quickly whether to continue or go back Runners may not taunt or otherwise bait throws Failure of the runners to quickly make a decision andor the appearance of trying to bait a throw will result in the following

i First Occurrence Warning to the Manager and bench of offensive team

ii Subsequent Occurrences The lead runner will be called out and must return to the

bench

b If the ball is at the same base as the lead runner the lead runner must stop

c If the ball is at a base which is behind the lead runner (ie lead runner is at second and the ball is at first) the runner can continue

d If there are two base runners (say 1st and 3rd) and the ball is at the base in front of the lead runner (ie home) the following runner can continue to second base at hisher risk

14 Runners may not advance on overthrows back to the pitcher

15 Runners may advance one base on overthrows that go out of play

16 The manager is allowed to use coaches or players as base coaches

17 A new inning cannot be started after 120 minutes from the start of the game

a The start of a new inning is when the defensive team takes the field

18 Warm-up time between innings should be minimized in order to get games completed within the scheduled

time

a When possible players who are expected to play Catcher the following half inning should get their catcherrsquos gear on and be ready to take the field once their team is retired

15

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

a Games will be played for 90 minutes The goal is to play as many innings as possible within the

90-minute time frame There is a hard stop at the 90-minute mark No score keeping no stealing

b The first pitch of the game will be thrown at the game start time indicated on the schedule Any warm ups shall be conducted prior to game time

5 Each team will dress and play a catcher

6 Each team will have a set batting order every game The order shall not change each inning

7 On defense we will count the number of ldquofieldedrdquo outs Inning will end if the defense successfully records

3 outs (strikeouts donrsquot count) or the offensive teams bats through the entire lineup once

8 Offensive Coach will utilize a pitching machine supplied by the League to throw consistent strikes to the batters If the player does not get a hit after 5 swings the Offensive Coach is REQUIRED to have the hitter use a batting tee to hit the ball No exceptions in terms of surpassing 5 swings or not using the tee The game needs to be kept moving in an efficient manner

9 Every defensive player takes a position in the field each inning Positions should approximate regular

baseball fielding positions Defensive players should rotate positions each inning

10 Batters and base runners MUST wear helmets Protective cups are encouraged but not required However any player who wants to play Catcher is required to wear a protective cup

11 Runners advance one base on infield hits On hits to the outfield runners advance on coachrsquos discretion

but must stop when the ball is returned to the infield

12 Make play at correct base after each hit the runner is retired if he or she is out

13 No advancement on over-throws

14 Get the ball to the playerpitcher after each playmdashCoach gets overthrows

15 The offense should place adults as 1st and 3rd base Coaches to direct the runners

16 The defensive Coaches should be on the field coaching the defense

17 The last batter advances normallymdashone base on infield hit multiple bases if hit to the outfield The last batter does NOT circle the bases (for the sake of doing so) like the T-Ball kids do

18 Throw from outfield using the relay

632 2nd Half of the Season

1 TEES ARE NOT ALLOWED IN THE SECOND HALF OF THE SEASON

2 If both Managers agree prior to a start of a game then a player from each team will pitch each inning

a In the AA Division we want to introduce batters to player pitching but if a AA League Manager does not have players (s)he feels can or should pitch the two opposing Managers can decide before the game that players pitch for only 1 inning or 2 innings and the rest of the game can be pitched via the Pitching Machine The safety of the players is the most important aspect of any game

10

b If a team determines that they do not have a player pitcher then batters get a maximum of 5

swings off of the pitching machine The 3 missing player pitches are eliminated from the at bat

3 The rules for Kid Pitching in AA

a Only kids who can throw reasonably accurately are allowed to pitch and if needed they are allowed to pitch from an area slightly closer to home plate (as long as itrsquos safe for the batter)

b Kid pitchers will throw a MAXIMUM of 3 pitches per hitter If the ball is not put in play the coach steps in to use the Pitching Machine and the batter is given hisher usual 5 swings

c If a batter is unsuccessful after 3 kid pitches and 5 pitching machine pitches then they are declared out by strikeout

d The Pitching Machine should be set up on Pitcherrsquos Mound and ready to go on the field during the 2nd half of the season to insure a speedy transition from ldquokid pitchrdquo to ldquomachine pitchrdquo if no contact is made after the 3 kid pitches

4 A 5th swing foul is not an out The at-bat will continue until the ball is hit in to play or a 5th or subsequent

pitch is missed

7 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division is generally intended for players League Age 9ndash12 years old The AAA Division is more competitive than AA Division but its focus is still on instruction and participation It is intended to teach more refined team play with a greater emphasis on developing individual skills Each team is composed of 11 to 13 players along with one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches Scores are kept Each team plays 10-15 games two to three games a week Games are 6 innings long An official Little League Baseball is used for all practices and games The AAA League Director represents the AAA League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The AAA League Director with the approval of the League President selects Managers for the AAA League Managing in the AAA Division is not easy because of the range of age and talent in the players Players as young as 8 are eligible to play in the AAA Division while players as old as 11 (and if a parent requests as old as 12) may still be playing in the AAA League With such a mix you have the potential of physically bigger players playing against significantly smaller players This is compounded by the fact that some of the 8 and 9 year olds may be considered the most talented players in their age group while some of the older players are likely to have been passed over in the Major League draft one or more times Because of this it is important that the AAA Division Manager be aware of possible bruised egos and hurt feelings on the part of some players andor their parents The AAA Division is a more competitive League than the AA Division and the Manager should not be expected to give preferential treatment to any player but the Manager should be aware that such feelings might exist and therefore should emphasize and recognize positive play and attitude Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

1 Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

2 Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

11

3 BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

4 The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

5 Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules

6 Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

7 Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League Baseball

which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

8 Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

9 Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

10 Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will

inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

11 All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field

until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

Each AAA team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field 71 Team Selection Each AAA Division team is totally restocked each year Players are not carried on the same roster from one year to the next AAA League teams are selected in a player draft and all eligible players are required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the Player Agent It is the responsibility of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent to supervise the AAA League draft in an attempt to distribute the players into evenly balanced teams The draft may be run in accordance with the Method in First Year of OperationmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo In order to fulfill the age and skill requirements the AAA Division must conduct its draft in the following manner

1 Eligible children of the AAA managers are automatically assigned to their parents team This provision is considered the written option required by Little League A manager may request to waive this option in writing before the draft starts The order for each round will be determined by the total score of drafted players through the most recently completed round

2 Each team on the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent should have an equal number of players assigned to their roster who are considered viable pitchers (the Managers child could fulfill part of this requirement) Note that 12 year olds cannot pitch in the AAA Division

12

3 On the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent the 9 10 11 and 12-year-old players who were not previously selected in the Major League draft should be drafted on a round-by-round basis Note all 10ndash12 year old players not selected in the Major League draft and all 9 years old players must be drafted into the AAA League at this time 9 years old players can play down in AA if requested by a parent or at the recommendation of the AAA League Director

4 Finally if any roster spots are still available after the 9ndash12 year old players have been selected on the recommendations of the AAA Division Director and the League Player Agent 8 year old players who are considered skilled enough and who have requested to play at the AAA Division level can be drafted

Note that the Local League requires that if a Major League player misses more than three consecutive games due to illness or injury that players team must fill that roster spot with the highest rated eligible player from the Player Agentrsquos list of eligible players in the AAA Division This generally occurs at least once a year This allows the possibility of an 11 year old who may have been overlooked in the draft to be called up to the Major League during the season See player agent section for more details 72 Skills to Teach In AAA Division the Manager and Coaches teach baseball fundamentals with an emphasis on more refined team play and individual skills

1 Team skills and practices to teach

a How a defensive team functions as a whole The role each defensive player has in basics defensive plays an infield grounder to the right side of the infield to the left side of the infield pop flies to left to center to right etc

b SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual (ASAP Plan) for Managers and Coaches

2 Individual skills and practices to teach

a The batter should not turn their head when facing a pitch

b Proper throwing technique use a crow hop to set the feet throw across the body etc

c How to run the bases make a wide turn on a walk cut the base on an extra base hit stealing a

base

d How to field a grounder use two hands come up in proper throwing position

e How to track and catch a fly ball catch the ball with two hands over the head use crossover steps to run back

f How a catcher should block a bad pitch throwing out base runner on a steal

g Pitching throw strikes not speed

h Good sportsmanship

i Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

j Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day

13

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season

1 Scorebooks are kept by each team but statistics should be kept to a minimum with no posting of individual results All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside the dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to the player attempting to make a play on the ball)

2 9 players take defensive positions in the field for each inning but all players are included in each teams batting order for the entire game

3 Minimum Playing Time rules in AAA

a 12 Player Roster (or fewer) on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

b 13 Player Roster on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) 1 Exception

a Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

b The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

c Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

4 Every player is required to play at least two (2) innings (6 outs) in the infield per game unless a legitimate

safety concern is raised by the player or coach

a Free substitution is allowed except for the pitcher Once a pitcher has been removed from the mound they may not pitch again during that game

5 Players may not play the same defensive position including pitcher and catcher positions for more than 3

innings a game

a If a player plays a position for 1 pitch in an inning it counts as an inning Example A pitcher enters the game in the 4th inning with 2 outs and throws 1 pitch to record the final outhellipthat counts as 1 inning pitched

6 Each team bats until the defensive team gets three outs or 4 runs are scored No more than 4 runs are

scored in an inning Example 3 runs are already in and the bases are loaded The batter hits a home run Only the 4th run is counted The other three runs do not count

7 Batters get 3 strikes or walk on 4 balls

14

8 Bunting is allowed during the entire season

9 No leading is allowed

10 Stealing is allowed

a Stealing of home plate is only allowed with two outs

i If a runner steals home with less than two outs and is tagged out prior to crossing the plate the runner is out

ii If the runner successfully crosses the plate without being tagged they will be sent back to third base with no out recorded

11 Stealing is allowed one base at a time The catcher is encouraged to throw the ball and attempt to throw out

the base runner The runner(s) cannot advance any additional bases on a wild throw by the catcher or an error by the fielder

12 After a walk the batter may not automatically advance to 2nd base (even if ball 4 goes to the backstop) If a walk occurs the batter is only entitled to 1st base

13 The play is complete and all runners must stop when the defense possesses the ball at the base in front of the lead runner

a If the runner is in progress to the base they must decide quickly whether to continue or go back Runners may not taunt or otherwise bait throws Failure of the runners to quickly make a decision andor the appearance of trying to bait a throw will result in the following

i First Occurrence Warning to the Manager and bench of offensive team

ii Subsequent Occurrences The lead runner will be called out and must return to the

bench

b If the ball is at the same base as the lead runner the lead runner must stop

c If the ball is at a base which is behind the lead runner (ie lead runner is at second and the ball is at first) the runner can continue

d If there are two base runners (say 1st and 3rd) and the ball is at the base in front of the lead runner (ie home) the following runner can continue to second base at hisher risk

14 Runners may not advance on overthrows back to the pitcher

15 Runners may advance one base on overthrows that go out of play

16 The manager is allowed to use coaches or players as base coaches

17 A new inning cannot be started after 120 minutes from the start of the game

a The start of a new inning is when the defensive team takes the field

18 Warm-up time between innings should be minimized in order to get games completed within the scheduled

time

a When possible players who are expected to play Catcher the following half inning should get their catcherrsquos gear on and be ready to take the field once their team is retired

15

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

b If a team determines that they do not have a player pitcher then batters get a maximum of 5

swings off of the pitching machine The 3 missing player pitches are eliminated from the at bat

3 The rules for Kid Pitching in AA

a Only kids who can throw reasonably accurately are allowed to pitch and if needed they are allowed to pitch from an area slightly closer to home plate (as long as itrsquos safe for the batter)

b Kid pitchers will throw a MAXIMUM of 3 pitches per hitter If the ball is not put in play the coach steps in to use the Pitching Machine and the batter is given hisher usual 5 swings

c If a batter is unsuccessful after 3 kid pitches and 5 pitching machine pitches then they are declared out by strikeout

d The Pitching Machine should be set up on Pitcherrsquos Mound and ready to go on the field during the 2nd half of the season to insure a speedy transition from ldquokid pitchrdquo to ldquomachine pitchrdquo if no contact is made after the 3 kid pitches

4 A 5th swing foul is not an out The at-bat will continue until the ball is hit in to play or a 5th or subsequent

pitch is missed

7 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division is generally intended for players League Age 9ndash12 years old The AAA Division is more competitive than AA Division but its focus is still on instruction and participation It is intended to teach more refined team play with a greater emphasis on developing individual skills Each team is composed of 11 to 13 players along with one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches Scores are kept Each team plays 10-15 games two to three games a week Games are 6 innings long An official Little League Baseball is used for all practices and games The AAA League Director represents the AAA League on the Local League Board of Directors and is the administrator of all League policy within this level The AAA League Director with the approval of the League President selects Managers for the AAA League Managing in the AAA Division is not easy because of the range of age and talent in the players Players as young as 8 are eligible to play in the AAA Division while players as old as 11 (and if a parent requests as old as 12) may still be playing in the AAA League With such a mix you have the potential of physically bigger players playing against significantly smaller players This is compounded by the fact that some of the 8 and 9 year olds may be considered the most talented players in their age group while some of the older players are likely to have been passed over in the Major League draft one or more times Because of this it is important that the AAA Division Manager be aware of possible bruised egos and hurt feelings on the part of some players andor their parents The AAA Division is a more competitive League than the AA Division and the Manager should not be expected to give preferential treatment to any player but the Manager should be aware that such feelings might exist and therefore should emphasize and recognize positive play and attitude Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

1 Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

2 Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

11

3 BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

4 The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

5 Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules

6 Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

7 Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League Baseball

which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

8 Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

9 Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

10 Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will

inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

11 All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field

until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

Each AAA team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field 71 Team Selection Each AAA Division team is totally restocked each year Players are not carried on the same roster from one year to the next AAA League teams are selected in a player draft and all eligible players are required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the Player Agent It is the responsibility of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent to supervise the AAA League draft in an attempt to distribute the players into evenly balanced teams The draft may be run in accordance with the Method in First Year of OperationmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo In order to fulfill the age and skill requirements the AAA Division must conduct its draft in the following manner

1 Eligible children of the AAA managers are automatically assigned to their parents team This provision is considered the written option required by Little League A manager may request to waive this option in writing before the draft starts The order for each round will be determined by the total score of drafted players through the most recently completed round

2 Each team on the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent should have an equal number of players assigned to their roster who are considered viable pitchers (the Managers child could fulfill part of this requirement) Note that 12 year olds cannot pitch in the AAA Division

12

3 On the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent the 9 10 11 and 12-year-old players who were not previously selected in the Major League draft should be drafted on a round-by-round basis Note all 10ndash12 year old players not selected in the Major League draft and all 9 years old players must be drafted into the AAA League at this time 9 years old players can play down in AA if requested by a parent or at the recommendation of the AAA League Director

4 Finally if any roster spots are still available after the 9ndash12 year old players have been selected on the recommendations of the AAA Division Director and the League Player Agent 8 year old players who are considered skilled enough and who have requested to play at the AAA Division level can be drafted

Note that the Local League requires that if a Major League player misses more than three consecutive games due to illness or injury that players team must fill that roster spot with the highest rated eligible player from the Player Agentrsquos list of eligible players in the AAA Division This generally occurs at least once a year This allows the possibility of an 11 year old who may have been overlooked in the draft to be called up to the Major League during the season See player agent section for more details 72 Skills to Teach In AAA Division the Manager and Coaches teach baseball fundamentals with an emphasis on more refined team play and individual skills

1 Team skills and practices to teach

a How a defensive team functions as a whole The role each defensive player has in basics defensive plays an infield grounder to the right side of the infield to the left side of the infield pop flies to left to center to right etc

b SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual (ASAP Plan) for Managers and Coaches

2 Individual skills and practices to teach

a The batter should not turn their head when facing a pitch

b Proper throwing technique use a crow hop to set the feet throw across the body etc

c How to run the bases make a wide turn on a walk cut the base on an extra base hit stealing a

base

d How to field a grounder use two hands come up in proper throwing position

e How to track and catch a fly ball catch the ball with two hands over the head use crossover steps to run back

f How a catcher should block a bad pitch throwing out base runner on a steal

g Pitching throw strikes not speed

h Good sportsmanship

i Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

j Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day

13

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season

1 Scorebooks are kept by each team but statistics should be kept to a minimum with no posting of individual results All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside the dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to the player attempting to make a play on the ball)

2 9 players take defensive positions in the field for each inning but all players are included in each teams batting order for the entire game

3 Minimum Playing Time rules in AAA

a 12 Player Roster (or fewer) on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

b 13 Player Roster on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) 1 Exception

a Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

b The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

c Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

4 Every player is required to play at least two (2) innings (6 outs) in the infield per game unless a legitimate

safety concern is raised by the player or coach

a Free substitution is allowed except for the pitcher Once a pitcher has been removed from the mound they may not pitch again during that game

5 Players may not play the same defensive position including pitcher and catcher positions for more than 3

innings a game

a If a player plays a position for 1 pitch in an inning it counts as an inning Example A pitcher enters the game in the 4th inning with 2 outs and throws 1 pitch to record the final outhellipthat counts as 1 inning pitched

6 Each team bats until the defensive team gets three outs or 4 runs are scored No more than 4 runs are

scored in an inning Example 3 runs are already in and the bases are loaded The batter hits a home run Only the 4th run is counted The other three runs do not count

7 Batters get 3 strikes or walk on 4 balls

14

8 Bunting is allowed during the entire season

9 No leading is allowed

10 Stealing is allowed

a Stealing of home plate is only allowed with two outs

i If a runner steals home with less than two outs and is tagged out prior to crossing the plate the runner is out

ii If the runner successfully crosses the plate without being tagged they will be sent back to third base with no out recorded

11 Stealing is allowed one base at a time The catcher is encouraged to throw the ball and attempt to throw out

the base runner The runner(s) cannot advance any additional bases on a wild throw by the catcher or an error by the fielder

12 After a walk the batter may not automatically advance to 2nd base (even if ball 4 goes to the backstop) If a walk occurs the batter is only entitled to 1st base

13 The play is complete and all runners must stop when the defense possesses the ball at the base in front of the lead runner

a If the runner is in progress to the base they must decide quickly whether to continue or go back Runners may not taunt or otherwise bait throws Failure of the runners to quickly make a decision andor the appearance of trying to bait a throw will result in the following

i First Occurrence Warning to the Manager and bench of offensive team

ii Subsequent Occurrences The lead runner will be called out and must return to the

bench

b If the ball is at the same base as the lead runner the lead runner must stop

c If the ball is at a base which is behind the lead runner (ie lead runner is at second and the ball is at first) the runner can continue

d If there are two base runners (say 1st and 3rd) and the ball is at the base in front of the lead runner (ie home) the following runner can continue to second base at hisher risk

14 Runners may not advance on overthrows back to the pitcher

15 Runners may advance one base on overthrows that go out of play

16 The manager is allowed to use coaches or players as base coaches

17 A new inning cannot be started after 120 minutes from the start of the game

a The start of a new inning is when the defensive team takes the field

18 Warm-up time between innings should be minimized in order to get games completed within the scheduled

time

a When possible players who are expected to play Catcher the following half inning should get their catcherrsquos gear on and be ready to take the field once their team is retired

15

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

3 BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

4 The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

5 Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules

6 Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

7 Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League Baseball

which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

8 Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

9 Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

10 Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will

inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

11 All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field

until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

Each AAA team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season First-aid kit and baseball equipment is stored (and locked) in the equipment box at the field 71 Team Selection Each AAA Division team is totally restocked each year Players are not carried on the same roster from one year to the next AAA League teams are selected in a player draft and all eligible players are required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the Player Agent It is the responsibility of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent to supervise the AAA League draft in an attempt to distribute the players into evenly balanced teams The draft may be run in accordance with the Method in First Year of OperationmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo In order to fulfill the age and skill requirements the AAA Division must conduct its draft in the following manner

1 Eligible children of the AAA managers are automatically assigned to their parents team This provision is considered the written option required by Little League A manager may request to waive this option in writing before the draft starts The order for each round will be determined by the total score of drafted players through the most recently completed round

2 Each team on the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent should have an equal number of players assigned to their roster who are considered viable pitchers (the Managers child could fulfill part of this requirement) Note that 12 year olds cannot pitch in the AAA Division

12

3 On the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent the 9 10 11 and 12-year-old players who were not previously selected in the Major League draft should be drafted on a round-by-round basis Note all 10ndash12 year old players not selected in the Major League draft and all 9 years old players must be drafted into the AAA League at this time 9 years old players can play down in AA if requested by a parent or at the recommendation of the AAA League Director

4 Finally if any roster spots are still available after the 9ndash12 year old players have been selected on the recommendations of the AAA Division Director and the League Player Agent 8 year old players who are considered skilled enough and who have requested to play at the AAA Division level can be drafted

Note that the Local League requires that if a Major League player misses more than three consecutive games due to illness or injury that players team must fill that roster spot with the highest rated eligible player from the Player Agentrsquos list of eligible players in the AAA Division This generally occurs at least once a year This allows the possibility of an 11 year old who may have been overlooked in the draft to be called up to the Major League during the season See player agent section for more details 72 Skills to Teach In AAA Division the Manager and Coaches teach baseball fundamentals with an emphasis on more refined team play and individual skills

1 Team skills and practices to teach

a How a defensive team functions as a whole The role each defensive player has in basics defensive plays an infield grounder to the right side of the infield to the left side of the infield pop flies to left to center to right etc

b SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual (ASAP Plan) for Managers and Coaches

2 Individual skills and practices to teach

a The batter should not turn their head when facing a pitch

b Proper throwing technique use a crow hop to set the feet throw across the body etc

c How to run the bases make a wide turn on a walk cut the base on an extra base hit stealing a

base

d How to field a grounder use two hands come up in proper throwing position

e How to track and catch a fly ball catch the ball with two hands over the head use crossover steps to run back

f How a catcher should block a bad pitch throwing out base runner on a steal

g Pitching throw strikes not speed

h Good sportsmanship

i Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

j Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day

13

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season

1 Scorebooks are kept by each team but statistics should be kept to a minimum with no posting of individual results All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside the dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to the player attempting to make a play on the ball)

2 9 players take defensive positions in the field for each inning but all players are included in each teams batting order for the entire game

3 Minimum Playing Time rules in AAA

a 12 Player Roster (or fewer) on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

b 13 Player Roster on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) 1 Exception

a Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

b The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

c Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

4 Every player is required to play at least two (2) innings (6 outs) in the infield per game unless a legitimate

safety concern is raised by the player or coach

a Free substitution is allowed except for the pitcher Once a pitcher has been removed from the mound they may not pitch again during that game

5 Players may not play the same defensive position including pitcher and catcher positions for more than 3

innings a game

a If a player plays a position for 1 pitch in an inning it counts as an inning Example A pitcher enters the game in the 4th inning with 2 outs and throws 1 pitch to record the final outhellipthat counts as 1 inning pitched

6 Each team bats until the defensive team gets three outs or 4 runs are scored No more than 4 runs are

scored in an inning Example 3 runs are already in and the bases are loaded The batter hits a home run Only the 4th run is counted The other three runs do not count

7 Batters get 3 strikes or walk on 4 balls

14

8 Bunting is allowed during the entire season

9 No leading is allowed

10 Stealing is allowed

a Stealing of home plate is only allowed with two outs

i If a runner steals home with less than two outs and is tagged out prior to crossing the plate the runner is out

ii If the runner successfully crosses the plate without being tagged they will be sent back to third base with no out recorded

11 Stealing is allowed one base at a time The catcher is encouraged to throw the ball and attempt to throw out

the base runner The runner(s) cannot advance any additional bases on a wild throw by the catcher or an error by the fielder

12 After a walk the batter may not automatically advance to 2nd base (even if ball 4 goes to the backstop) If a walk occurs the batter is only entitled to 1st base

13 The play is complete and all runners must stop when the defense possesses the ball at the base in front of the lead runner

a If the runner is in progress to the base they must decide quickly whether to continue or go back Runners may not taunt or otherwise bait throws Failure of the runners to quickly make a decision andor the appearance of trying to bait a throw will result in the following

i First Occurrence Warning to the Manager and bench of offensive team

ii Subsequent Occurrences The lead runner will be called out and must return to the

bench

b If the ball is at the same base as the lead runner the lead runner must stop

c If the ball is at a base which is behind the lead runner (ie lead runner is at second and the ball is at first) the runner can continue

d If there are two base runners (say 1st and 3rd) and the ball is at the base in front of the lead runner (ie home) the following runner can continue to second base at hisher risk

14 Runners may not advance on overthrows back to the pitcher

15 Runners may advance one base on overthrows that go out of play

16 The manager is allowed to use coaches or players as base coaches

17 A new inning cannot be started after 120 minutes from the start of the game

a The start of a new inning is when the defensive team takes the field

18 Warm-up time between innings should be minimized in order to get games completed within the scheduled

time

a When possible players who are expected to play Catcher the following half inning should get their catcherrsquos gear on and be ready to take the field once their team is retired

15

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

3 On the recommendations of the AAA League Director and the Player Agent the 9 10 11 and 12-year-old players who were not previously selected in the Major League draft should be drafted on a round-by-round basis Note all 10ndash12 year old players not selected in the Major League draft and all 9 years old players must be drafted into the AAA League at this time 9 years old players can play down in AA if requested by a parent or at the recommendation of the AAA League Director

4 Finally if any roster spots are still available after the 9ndash12 year old players have been selected on the recommendations of the AAA Division Director and the League Player Agent 8 year old players who are considered skilled enough and who have requested to play at the AAA Division level can be drafted

Note that the Local League requires that if a Major League player misses more than three consecutive games due to illness or injury that players team must fill that roster spot with the highest rated eligible player from the Player Agentrsquos list of eligible players in the AAA Division This generally occurs at least once a year This allows the possibility of an 11 year old who may have been overlooked in the draft to be called up to the Major League during the season See player agent section for more details 72 Skills to Teach In AAA Division the Manager and Coaches teach baseball fundamentals with an emphasis on more refined team play and individual skills

1 Team skills and practices to teach

a How a defensive team functions as a whole The role each defensive player has in basics defensive plays an infield grounder to the right side of the infield to the left side of the infield pop flies to left to center to right etc

b SafetymdashPlease review and enforce the guidelines outlined in the George P Gibbs Jr Little League Safety Manual (ASAP Plan) for Managers and Coaches

2 Individual skills and practices to teach

a The batter should not turn their head when facing a pitch

b Proper throwing technique use a crow hop to set the feet throw across the body etc

c How to run the bases make a wide turn on a walk cut the base on an extra base hit stealing a

base

d How to field a grounder use two hands come up in proper throwing position

e How to track and catch a fly ball catch the ball with two hands over the head use crossover steps to run back

f How a catcher should block a bad pitch throwing out base runner on a steal

g Pitching throw strikes not speed

h Good sportsmanship

i Learn how to avoid getting hit by a pitch

j Practices will be held at least one day a week on a separate day from game day

13

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season

1 Scorebooks are kept by each team but statistics should be kept to a minimum with no posting of individual results All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside the dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to the player attempting to make a play on the ball)

2 9 players take defensive positions in the field for each inning but all players are included in each teams batting order for the entire game

3 Minimum Playing Time rules in AAA

a 12 Player Roster (or fewer) on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

b 13 Player Roster on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) 1 Exception

a Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

b The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

c Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

4 Every player is required to play at least two (2) innings (6 outs) in the infield per game unless a legitimate

safety concern is raised by the player or coach

a Free substitution is allowed except for the pitcher Once a pitcher has been removed from the mound they may not pitch again during that game

5 Players may not play the same defensive position including pitcher and catcher positions for more than 3

innings a game

a If a player plays a position for 1 pitch in an inning it counts as an inning Example A pitcher enters the game in the 4th inning with 2 outs and throws 1 pitch to record the final outhellipthat counts as 1 inning pitched

6 Each team bats until the defensive team gets three outs or 4 runs are scored No more than 4 runs are

scored in an inning Example 3 runs are already in and the bases are loaded The batter hits a home run Only the 4th run is counted The other three runs do not count

7 Batters get 3 strikes or walk on 4 balls

14

8 Bunting is allowed during the entire season

9 No leading is allowed

10 Stealing is allowed

a Stealing of home plate is only allowed with two outs

i If a runner steals home with less than two outs and is tagged out prior to crossing the plate the runner is out

ii If the runner successfully crosses the plate without being tagged they will be sent back to third base with no out recorded

11 Stealing is allowed one base at a time The catcher is encouraged to throw the ball and attempt to throw out

the base runner The runner(s) cannot advance any additional bases on a wild throw by the catcher or an error by the fielder

12 After a walk the batter may not automatically advance to 2nd base (even if ball 4 goes to the backstop) If a walk occurs the batter is only entitled to 1st base

13 The play is complete and all runners must stop when the defense possesses the ball at the base in front of the lead runner

a If the runner is in progress to the base they must decide quickly whether to continue or go back Runners may not taunt or otherwise bait throws Failure of the runners to quickly make a decision andor the appearance of trying to bait a throw will result in the following

i First Occurrence Warning to the Manager and bench of offensive team

ii Subsequent Occurrences The lead runner will be called out and must return to the

bench

b If the ball is at the same base as the lead runner the lead runner must stop

c If the ball is at a base which is behind the lead runner (ie lead runner is at second and the ball is at first) the runner can continue

d If there are two base runners (say 1st and 3rd) and the ball is at the base in front of the lead runner (ie home) the following runner can continue to second base at hisher risk

14 Runners may not advance on overthrows back to the pitcher

15 Runners may advance one base on overthrows that go out of play

16 The manager is allowed to use coaches or players as base coaches

17 A new inning cannot be started after 120 minutes from the start of the game

a The start of a new inning is when the defensive team takes the field

18 Warm-up time between innings should be minimized in order to get games completed within the scheduled

time

a When possible players who are expected to play Catcher the following half inning should get their catcherrsquos gear on and be ready to take the field once their team is retired

15

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

73 Game Format 731 1st Half of the Season

1 Scorebooks are kept by each team but statistics should be kept to a minimum with no posting of individual results All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside the dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to the player attempting to make a play on the ball)

2 9 players take defensive positions in the field for each inning but all players are included in each teams batting order for the entire game

3 Minimum Playing Time rules in AAA

a 12 Player Roster (or fewer) on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

b 13 Player Roster on Gameday

i Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) 1 Exception

a Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

b The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

c Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

4 Every player is required to play at least two (2) innings (6 outs) in the infield per game unless a legitimate

safety concern is raised by the player or coach

a Free substitution is allowed except for the pitcher Once a pitcher has been removed from the mound they may not pitch again during that game

5 Players may not play the same defensive position including pitcher and catcher positions for more than 3

innings a game

a If a player plays a position for 1 pitch in an inning it counts as an inning Example A pitcher enters the game in the 4th inning with 2 outs and throws 1 pitch to record the final outhellipthat counts as 1 inning pitched

6 Each team bats until the defensive team gets three outs or 4 runs are scored No more than 4 runs are

scored in an inning Example 3 runs are already in and the bases are loaded The batter hits a home run Only the 4th run is counted The other three runs do not count

7 Batters get 3 strikes or walk on 4 balls

14

8 Bunting is allowed during the entire season

9 No leading is allowed

10 Stealing is allowed

a Stealing of home plate is only allowed with two outs

i If a runner steals home with less than two outs and is tagged out prior to crossing the plate the runner is out

ii If the runner successfully crosses the plate without being tagged they will be sent back to third base with no out recorded

11 Stealing is allowed one base at a time The catcher is encouraged to throw the ball and attempt to throw out

the base runner The runner(s) cannot advance any additional bases on a wild throw by the catcher or an error by the fielder

12 After a walk the batter may not automatically advance to 2nd base (even if ball 4 goes to the backstop) If a walk occurs the batter is only entitled to 1st base

13 The play is complete and all runners must stop when the defense possesses the ball at the base in front of the lead runner

a If the runner is in progress to the base they must decide quickly whether to continue or go back Runners may not taunt or otherwise bait throws Failure of the runners to quickly make a decision andor the appearance of trying to bait a throw will result in the following

i First Occurrence Warning to the Manager and bench of offensive team

ii Subsequent Occurrences The lead runner will be called out and must return to the

bench

b If the ball is at the same base as the lead runner the lead runner must stop

c If the ball is at a base which is behind the lead runner (ie lead runner is at second and the ball is at first) the runner can continue

d If there are two base runners (say 1st and 3rd) and the ball is at the base in front of the lead runner (ie home) the following runner can continue to second base at hisher risk

14 Runners may not advance on overthrows back to the pitcher

15 Runners may advance one base on overthrows that go out of play

16 The manager is allowed to use coaches or players as base coaches

17 A new inning cannot be started after 120 minutes from the start of the game

a The start of a new inning is when the defensive team takes the field

18 Warm-up time between innings should be minimized in order to get games completed within the scheduled

time

a When possible players who are expected to play Catcher the following half inning should get their catcherrsquos gear on and be ready to take the field once their team is retired

15

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

8 Bunting is allowed during the entire season

9 No leading is allowed

10 Stealing is allowed

a Stealing of home plate is only allowed with two outs

i If a runner steals home with less than two outs and is tagged out prior to crossing the plate the runner is out

ii If the runner successfully crosses the plate without being tagged they will be sent back to third base with no out recorded

11 Stealing is allowed one base at a time The catcher is encouraged to throw the ball and attempt to throw out

the base runner The runner(s) cannot advance any additional bases on a wild throw by the catcher or an error by the fielder

12 After a walk the batter may not automatically advance to 2nd base (even if ball 4 goes to the backstop) If a walk occurs the batter is only entitled to 1st base

13 The play is complete and all runners must stop when the defense possesses the ball at the base in front of the lead runner

a If the runner is in progress to the base they must decide quickly whether to continue or go back Runners may not taunt or otherwise bait throws Failure of the runners to quickly make a decision andor the appearance of trying to bait a throw will result in the following

i First Occurrence Warning to the Manager and bench of offensive team

ii Subsequent Occurrences The lead runner will be called out and must return to the

bench

b If the ball is at the same base as the lead runner the lead runner must stop

c If the ball is at a base which is behind the lead runner (ie lead runner is at second and the ball is at first) the runner can continue

d If there are two base runners (say 1st and 3rd) and the ball is at the base in front of the lead runner (ie home) the following runner can continue to second base at hisher risk

14 Runners may not advance on overthrows back to the pitcher

15 Runners may advance one base on overthrows that go out of play

16 The manager is allowed to use coaches or players as base coaches

17 A new inning cannot be started after 120 minutes from the start of the game

a The start of a new inning is when the defensive team takes the field

18 Warm-up time between innings should be minimized in order to get games completed within the scheduled

time

a When possible players who are expected to play Catcher the following half inning should get their catcherrsquos gear on and be ready to take the field once their team is retired

15

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

19 Mercy Rule

a 12 run difference after 4 innings is enforced and the result of the game is final at that point

b Continuation of the game is up to the discretion of the coaches but the result of the game will not

change if the team losing by 12 comes back to win

i Pitch counts must still be recorded if Coaches choose to continue the game

ii Positional eligibility requirement are also still enforced after mercy rule is declared

20 At the conclusion of each game teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

732 2nd Half of the Season Progression

1 4 run rule lifted in the last inning

74 AAA Championship The AAA Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all AAA league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 741 Playoff Format

1 5 TEAMS

a If there are 5 teams in AAA there will be a ldquoPlay inrdquo game between the 4 amp 5 seeds to determine who will advance as the 4 seed Following the Play-In game the semi finals will be 1v4 and 2v3 Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested there are 2 days of rest after the Play-In game before the Semi Finals begin And itrsquos suggested to have 1 day of rest between the Semi Finals and Finals

2 4 TEAMS

a If there are 4 teams in AAA the Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3

schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

3 3 TEAMS

a If there are 3 teams in AAA the 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a

single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

742 Tiebreakers In order to break ties in regular season play to accurately slot teams into the league playoffs Gibbs Little League has adopted the following rules to break ties

16

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total

Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1 plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip

75 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote If there are 5 teams in AAA the 5 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all-stars If there are 4 teams in AAA the 6 players receiving the most votes from each team will be named all stars If there are 3 teams in AAA the top 8 vote-receivers on each team will be named all-stars

b Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

c The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

17

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

76 Post Season Tournament Play At the conclusion of the season the AAA League Managers will select a Postseason Tournament Team The League Director and League President will settle any disputes This tournament team will compete in regional AAA League all-star tournaments (typically Worcester or Holden) Specifics on these tournaments will be discussed as the season progresses District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well NOTE Participation in these tournaments has gone a long way to improving the level of competition and Managerial ability within the League while improving Sterlings competitive showing in the various post-season tournament in which we take part These tournaments are great for players Managers and Coaches alike

8 Major League The Major League is generally intended for players League Age 10ndash12 It is the highest most competitive level in the Local League It is intended to teach more refined individual and team skills with continued emphasis on good sportsmanship The ultimate objective of the Major League is to field teams that are highly skilled and competitive within the Local League and in post season tournaments

1 Unless otherwise noted in this handbook the Major League adheres to all the rules and regulations set forth in the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo

a All Coaches must remain on their feet outside of the dugout (Bucket sitting outside dugout is not allowed since it could interfere with game play or cause hazard to player attempting to make play on ball)

b All ldquorain outsrdquo will be made up at the first available opportunity as determined by the scheduling coordinator

c All players shall start at least one half of all regular season games

d Minimum Playing Time rules in Majors is as follows

i 12 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings

ii 13 Player Roster on Gameday

1 Every player must play a minimum of 4 innings (See below for exception) a Exception

i Maximum of 2 players each game are allowed to be benched 3 times

ii The same player(s) cannot be benched 3 times in consecutive games heshe plays in For example if the Mets play M-W-F and Johnny is benched 3x on Monday then Johnny misses WED game then shows up FRI Johnny cannot be benched 3x on FRI since he was not playing on WED

iii Please Note This is OPTIONAL The goal of this exception is to keep competition more equitable versus teams with 12 players Teams with 12 players possess more roster flexibility and this exception helps to even any perceived competitive advantage

18

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

e Each player is required to play at least one (1) inning in the infield per game unless a legitimate safety concern is raised by the player or coach

f There is no time limit in Little League Majors play

g At the conclusion of each game both teams should collectively rake and drag the the infield pitching amp hitting areas fill any holes amp apply the tarps if required

2 In the Major League the Manager and Coaches teach and reinforce the same baseball fundamentals that are emphasized in the Minor League AAA Division The only difference is the more refined nature of team play when to cut-off a throw how to throw-out a runner who is stealing how to backup a pick-off player etc

3 Good sportsmanship is expected by the players coaches and fans Sterling Little League umpires are typically youths and young adults who are former players in our league Managers and Coaches are expected to treat these umpires with respect and to recognize that they like the coaches and the players are doing their best in a challenging game The following should be used as a guideline for what constitutes appropriate manager umpire interaction

a Umpires will be paid before rather than after each game

b Only the Manager (not coaches) may discuss issues with an umpire

c BallStrike and SafeOut judgment calls shall not be argued It is important that Managers and Coaches not only refrain from arguing with the umpires but to also be conscientious of their own reactions to calls made and the impression those reactions have on the players and the fans Managers are responsible for ensuring their coaches and players do not engage in any behaviors that show disrespect to the other team the umpires or to the game itself

d The Manager must ask for time out and permission to talk with an umpire

e Discussion with umpires shall be over the interpretation application of specific rules f Discussion shall be in a conversational tone of voice

g Managers and Umpires are expected to know to play by and to respect the rules of Little League

Baseball which differ in some respects from other levels of baseball

h Umpires are responsible for safety during the game and their instructions are to be followed

i Intimidation of umpires may result in severe disciplinary action including suspension or expulsion from the league

j Managers should inform the Umpire in Chief of performance issues of any of the umpires Umpires will inform the Umpire in Chief of any unsportsmanlike or other objectionable behavior by coaches players or other participants

k All umpires have the power of ejection and this power extends from the time the umpires arrive at the field until the time they leave Ejection is a judgment call on the part of the umpire and may not be argued or appealed The offender must leave the field and the vicinity of the field and will be suspended for a minimum of one game

4 A problem that sometimes appears in the Major League is a condition that is called Daddy Ball Players

in the Major League are generally the most highly skilled players in the entire League and Managers are generally the parents of these players Sometimes the parentManager will act in one of two diametrically opposite manners They will attempt to push their son or daughter harder than everyone because they are the managerrsquos child and should be expected to perform better than everyone else or else give their son or

19

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

daughter preferential treatment As a manager you must be aware of this everyone is looking at you for leadership and fairness including your child

5 Each Major League team is issued its own equipment and uniforms The Team Manager is responsible for maintaining the equipment and uniforms in good condition during the season and is also responsible for collecting both at the end of each season

6 First-aid kit and field equipment is stored (and locked) in the concession stand or equipment box at each field

7 Manager must immediately inform League Director and Player Agent when a player on their team has missed 3 consecutive games or as soon as heshe knows that the player will not be available for three consecutive games

81 Team Selection

1 At the discretion of the Board of Directors the Major League teams may or may not be totally restocked each year

a Players may be carried on the same roster from one year to the next

b The balance of Major League teams is selected in a player draft and all eligible players are

required to participate in a skill evaluation organized by the League

2 The League Player Agent supervises Major League draft

a See the Player Agent section for more details about team drafts

3 The League President selects the Major League team managers yearly with inputs from various Local league members

4 The Local League board of directors set the size of the teams

5 Each team shall have one Manager and a maximum of three Assistant Coaches 82 Major League Championship The Major League Champion will be determined by a playoff tournament after the completion of regular season play The Championship tournament will involve all major league teams with playoff matchups determined by regular season record (specifically winning percentage) 821 Playoff Format

1 4 TEAMS

a Playoffs will be single elimination system with a 1v4 and 2v3 schedule for the semi finals Winners will meet in the Championship game It is suggested that there is 1 day of rest between the semi-finals and finals

2 3 TEAMS

a 1 seed receives a BYE and the 2 seed plays the 3 seed in a single elimination semi final It is suggested there are 2-3 days of rest before the championship which will be a 3-game

20

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

championship series The 1 seed plays the winner of the 2v3 semi final in a best of 3 series There will be 1 day of rest between each game of the Championship series The first team to win 2 of 3 games is the champion

822 Tiebreakers Tiebreaker rules for Majors playoff standings

1 Winning percentage

a Highest of (Total Number of Wins plus (Total Number of Ties times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played This could also be written as (wins + (ties 05)) games

2 Head to Head Winning percentage

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 1 of (Total Number of Wins against tied teams in 1

plus (Total Number of Ties against tied teams in 1 times 05)) divided by Total Number of Games played against tied teams in 1

3 Head to Head run differential

a Highest of all teams tied after computing 2 of Total number of runs scored when playing all tied

teams in 2 minus total number of runs allowed when playing tied teams in 2

4 Runs against overall

a Lowest of Total number of runs allowed for all games played in the division

5 Runs for overall

a Highest of Total number of runs scored for all games played in the division

6 Coin flip 83 All Star Competition At the conclusion of the season two all-star teams compete in a single intra-League all-star game

1 Players pitch for the entire game during the all-star game but each player can only pitch for up to two innings

2 All star players may be selected by player ballot and the Team managers Team managers and coaches will decide any ties or disputes They decide collectively who are the most skilled players in the League as follows

a The All-Stars from each team will be selected by a team vote

i 4 Majors Teams The top 6 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

ii 3 Majors Teams The top 8 players on each team receiving the most votes will be named all-stars

21

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

iii Two teams each with a recommended minimum of 12 players should be created As

much as possible players selected as All Stars who were on the same team during the regular season should be on the same all-star team

b The Manager of the 1st and 2nd place teams during the regular season each manages one of the all-star teams If they do not wish to do so the option is made available to the 3rd place Team Manager then 4th etc The Team Managers select their coaches

84 Tournament Selection Process At the conclusion of the season players will be selected to participate in post season tournaments subject to acceptable tournaments being available qualified managers and coaches able to volunteer and the Local League having the resources to participate It is the intent of the Local League that the tournament teamsrsquo best represent our Local League in competition and character It is important that the selection process be transparent and fair to all players in the Local League and exemplifies a democratic process as recommended by Little League Baseball 841 Tournament Types

1 District tournaments sponsored by Little League Baseball

a 1112 year olds

i comprised of 11 and 12 year old players in the Major League

ii 10 year olds in the Major League are not eligible to participate

b 910 year olds

i 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify to play on this team

2 Other tournaments

a 89 year olds

b 910 year olds

c 1112 year olds

3 The selection of tournaments will be determined by the Board of Directors 842 Team Selection Process

1 Nomination Process

a Each AAA and Majors player team Manager and Coaches will select 6 players from a team ballot said ballot will have the names of the eligible players (see eligibility criteria below) In the event that there are only 3 teams in a Division up to 8 players per team may be selected Each voter should select a candidate who heshe feels is worthy of tournament honors after considering the criteria and players can vote for themselves Each is asked to select players who excel in a variety of areas including

i Fundamental skills (hitting pitching fielding base running stealing sliding etc)

22

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

ii Consistency and precision in overall performance (Did the player consistently make contact when at bat and get on base Is the playerrsquos head in the game Does he or she often make smart decisions good plays and few errors defensively)

iii Adaptability versatility and flexibility (Often players who make a tournament team do not get to play the position that he or she played all season Can the player quickly adapt to a different position and is he or she willing to do so Can he or she take on an outfield position just as well as an infield position)

iv Positive attitude hustle team leadership overall character integrity and sportsmanship are other qualities considered

b 10 year old players in the Major League automatically qualify for the 910 year old district team

and their names will not be included on the team ballots

c Once all the ballots have been collected several members of the Board of Directors who do not have a child being considered in said division are appointed to count the votes together

d The top six vote recipients plus any ties from each team are elected to the official tournament selection process

2 Ranking

a The official selection pool for each tournament team will consist of 6 (AAA) or 8 (Majors) (plus ties) players from each regular season team It should be noted that selection to the tournament selection pool does not guarantee a player a spot on a tournament team

b For AAA each division team Manager in collaboration with their Coaches will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers

c For Majors each division team Manager and two Coaches from each team each will rank the players in the order of one through the end of the player pool based on a variety of areas as seen in the nomination section However they cannot rank any players from their own team This will help avoid a Manager trying to ldquostackrdquo their own players onto the team Therefore each player in the selection pool will have rankings from the opposing Managers and Coaches The Coaches shall be subject to approval by the Board of Directors

3 Team Selection

a Each playerrsquos scores are added up and are divided by the number of Manager rankings The

selection pool is then sorted by lowest to highest score to create the ldquoranking orderrdquo The Player Agent is responsible for creating the ranking order

b The top ten ranked players are automatically selected for the team The tournament Manager then picks the final two players based upon hisher preferenceteam needs from the remaining pool players with the selection of one of the two players subject to the majority of Majors Managersrsquo approval The alternate list is then created by the remaining player ranking order from this process If a player who is selected to the team elects not to participate or who may need to be replaced at a later date due to injury lack of commitment ineligibility or other unforeseen circumstance the next player on the alternate list will replace himher

c The selection results (number of votes ranking etc) are strictly confidential

23

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

d Players selected to a tournament team must be 100 percent committed to making all scheduled games and practices They also must meet the eligibility criteria (see below) Players cannot play on more than one tournament team

e The team manager will contact all parents of said team to verify if the player can commit to the team With respect to district teams the selection process cannot take place sooner than June 1st and players cannot be contacted until either June 15th or with special permission from the local District Administrator two weeks prior to the start of the tournament

4 Eligibility Criteria

a League age as determined by Little League Baseball

b Participation in 60 of the regular season (as of the date the Tournament Teams are announced) in

that division

c Residence as defined in the Little League Baseball Official Regulations

d Availability

i Whether the candidate will be able to practice and play with the team Will the player be away on vacation during some or all practicesgames If so the Local League may wish to disqualify the player from consideration

e Ability is solely in the opinion of those making the selections

5 Tournament Managers

a District Managers for the 9 year old 10 year old and 12 year old teams must all be voted on and approved by the Board

b Assistants coaches will be approved by the Board as well 85 Post Season Tournament Play Rules governing postseason practices and play are documented in a special Tournament Edition of the Official Regulations and Playing Rules for Little League Baseballrdquo These rules must be strictly interpreted and adhered to otherwise we risk disqualification 86 Managing Teams in Postseason Tournaments Over the past number of years Little League Baseball in Sterling has grown in both the number of players who participate and the quality of play on the field That growth is due in large part to the efforts of the parents and Coaches who directly participate in Little League Baseball A big part of that effort is the Leagues desire and ability to field a number of post season tournament teams As those who have taken part will attest tournament play can be a great experience for players and Coaches alike They are all very competitive The skill level is generally much higher than that experienced during the regular season The players learn a lot but the Managers and Coaches learn the most While it is fun and intense it can be a very humbling experience To participate in these tournaments is a lot of work It takes a lot of time and effort on the part of the players the Managers and the Coaches Not everyone has the time or desire to continue coaching well into the summer but all Managers and Coaches are encouraged to help in some way

24

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

9 League Player Agent Among other things the Player Agent conducts the tryouts the player draft and all other player transaction or selection meetings The Player Agent is required to follow the rules and regulations of the draft at set in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manual (published yearly by Little League Inc)rdquo and this handbook The team selection for each local league level is outlined in the following sections

91 Major League The ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo describes the draft system for the Major League The Major League may use the Methods for Existing LeaguesmdashPlan A which is documented in the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or it may use a ldquoBlind Managerrsquos Draftrdquo However the following are additional regulations set forth by the Local League Board of Directors for the Major League

1 A Major League team must start and play with a minimum of nine players If a team cannot field nine players an eligible replacement player from an active Minor League roster will fill it The Player Agent will provide a list of available players to the team manager

∙ If a player has been called up from the Minor League to play in the Major League that player will be returned to the Minor League after game

∙ A Minor League Player is not eligible to be called up to Majors if that player has a Minor league game that same day

2 A player is not eligible to be called up if the player was originally drafted and requested not to play in the Major League

3 In all roster changes for which a procedure is not otherwise spelled out in either the ldquoLittle League Operating Manualrdquo or this handbook then the Player Agent shall proceed as follows

∙ Before any action is taken the Player Agent shall seek the advice of all Managers of the affected League(s) and where appropriate the League director(s) as to the action to be taken and the procedure to be followed

∙ If all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may proceed as agreed upon

∙ If it is not the case that all parties agree on both action and procedure the Player Agent may take no action until a meeting of all parties concerned is held to discuss the matter

92 Minor League AAA Division The Minor League AAA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AAA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

93 Minor League AA Division The Minor League AA Division draft is outlined in the Minor League AA Division Team Selection section of this handbook

94 Tee-Ball League The Tee-Ball League team assignments are outlined in the Tee-Ball League Team Selection section of this handbook

25

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26

10 Parental Release and Authorization Form For insurance reasons if any player misses a game because they were either sick or injured the Local League requires that the players parent or guardian sign a release form indicating that they allow their son or daughter to resume play within the League The League President reserves the right to refuse to allow the player to return without further medical clearance There is the release that you can photocopy You must give all returned release forms to the Safety Officer and Player Agent

George P Gibbs Jr Little League Parental Authorization and Release Form The undersigned (parent or guardian) of _____________________________________________ who (was

injured)(became ill) on ______________________ hereby authorizes (him)(her) to resume participation without

restriction in all Local League activities I further release the George P Gibbs Jr Little League of Sterling

Massachusetts its officers directors managers coaches umpires agents and representatives from any and all

liability resulting from my (sons)(daughters) resumed participation in Local League activities

Date ________________________ Signed _______________________________________________

26